JP2017158862A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress decline in amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine has instruction state control means capable of controlling a state to either an instruction permission state which can permit execution of the instruction or an instruction impossible state which is impossible to permit execution of the instruction, as a game state related to execution of an instruction of the operation mode of stop operation means. The game machine has: instruction state shift control means capable of shifting from the instruction permission state to the instruction impossible state, on the basis of the fact that a predetermined termination condition is established; and instruction state teaching means capable of grasping the state is controlled in the instruction permission state or the instruction impossible state. In the case where a predetermined termination condition is established while a bonus game is executed, the state can be shifted from the instruction permission state to the instruction impossible state while maintaining execution of the bonus game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a swivel type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as slot machines, for example, when a bonus game or an ART game is started, a game is provided in an advantageous manner for a player over a predetermined period (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .

  In this type of gaming machine, even if a game advantageous to the player, such as a bonus game or an ART game, is finished, it is immediately started continuously (so-called consecutive resort), so that the interest is enhanced. There is something that was made.

JP 2002-172206 A

  However, if the game that is advantageous to the player is started continuously, the interest can be enhanced, but it may cause the greed to be shy. On the other hand, there is a risk that interest will be reduced if euphoria is suppressed.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

  The invention described in claim 1 includes a plurality of symbol rows that can be variably displayed, and a stop operation means that can stop the symbol rows that are variably displayed, and the stop operation means is operated. A bonus game that can execute a bonus game based on the fact that a bonus combination is selected in the combination lottery. The execution means, the advantageous game execution lottery means for performing the advantageous game execution lottery capable of continuously generating the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the result of the advantageous game execution lottery with the specific result Based on a certain thing, execution of the said instruction | indication is carried out as an advantageous game execution means which can execute the said advantageous game, and the game state in connection with execution of the instruction | indication of the operation mode of the said stop operation means. Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an instruction state control means that can be controlled to either an allowable instruction allowable state or an instruction impossible state in which execution of the instruction cannot be permitted, An instruction state transition control means for making a transition from the instruction allowable state to the instruction impossible state, and an instruction state teaching means capable of grasping which of the instruction allowable state and the instruction impossible state is controlled, When the predetermined end condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, the instruction state transition control means can shift from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disabling state while maintaining the execution of the bonus game. It is characterized by this.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent board. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view near the symbol display window in the slot machine as viewed from the front. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process sequence of a starting process. It is an example of the block diagram which shows transition of RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the rough process flow of an instruction | indication function process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process regarding generation | occurrence | production of an instruction | indication function. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a hell state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state A time process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an advantageous state B time process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an advantageous state C time process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an advantageous state D time process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the advantageous state E. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a pull-back state. It is an example of the lottery table used for an addition determination lottery. It is an example of the lottery table used for an extra game number determination lottery when the state is low in ART. It is an example of the lottery table used for an extra game number determination lottery when it is an ART medium high probability state. It is an example of the lottery table used for an extra game number determination lottery in a specialization zone. It is an example of the lottery table used for an extra game number determination lottery during special zone preparation. It is an example of the ART first lottery table in the advantageous state D during the game number management process. It is an example of a lottery state transition lottery table during ART. It is an example of a special zone lottery table. It is an example of the ART first hit lottery table in the pulled-back state. It is an example of an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT1. It is an example of an effect operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT2. It is an example of an effect operation lottery table when winning an internal lottery in RT3. It is another example of the production operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating instruction function display. It is a figure for demonstrating instruction function display. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an ART game determination process. It is a time chart which shows an example of the flow of the whole game. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by special display LED. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence. It is a flow chart for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a process sequence of an electric power interruption return process.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol fluctuation display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 shows heat dissipation from the back of the slot machine. FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate and the light emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. Is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member mounted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. The perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member, FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer main body 100 whose front surface is open, and a door that is laterally open with a rotary shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer main body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 that is pivotably attached to the door, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, and a case member that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface. 400 and an image display 500 that displays an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[1-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[1-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s or the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled into the apparatus case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[1-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[2. Door-shaped front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203 and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (medical release command) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stop buttons for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Down 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In addition, when a medal is rejected such as inserting medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set on the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[2-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[2-2. Door-shaped front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[2-3. Door-shaped front member-lock device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[3. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[4. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and Control boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[5. Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit that can display an image, for example, which includes at least a liquid crystal display (or may be a plasma display or an organic EL display), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510 can be integrally configured, and the handling is facilitated, and the wiring connecting the both can be omitted. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f that is in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[5-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[5-3. Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701a is in contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin excellent in lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[5-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is hereinafter referred to as a front opening / closing member 90.
(See FIG. 44).

[5-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
A lighting device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the entire surface, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  By the way, when the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) the conventional driving is performed at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at start-up and about 600 V at operation) because it is driven at a low voltage. (B) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Width of production because multicolor emission is possible (E) There is an advantage that it is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[6-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 that projects to the front of the part.

The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[6-2. Wiring means-connectors 425 and 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and then fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[6-2-1. Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member;
(H) The connector holder is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is attached to the outer main body, and the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means with the model unit mounted to the outer main body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[6-2-2. Connector 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, when the connection part of the boards (main board 409, sub board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Each reel symbol, symbol row]
As shown in FIG. 46, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a series of symbols (a total of 21 symbols indicated by array numbers 0 to 20) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which the symbol is marked is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience. 46 shows the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. In this description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are indicated as necessary.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize via the display window 401 (refer FIG. 47 demonstrated next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols include “7” symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbol”), “7” symbol painted in blue (hereinafter “7” symbol). "Blue 7 symbol"), "BAR symbol", "Cherry symbol with cherry symbol", "Watermelon symbol with watermelon symbol", "Replay symbol", "Bell symbol" "Bell design", "designed as" righteous "(hereinafter referred to as" righteous design ")", "designed as" positive "(hereinafter referred to as" corrected symbol ")" is there. The bell symbol can be divided into “bell 1 symbol” in which one star is drawn and “bell 2 symbol” in which two stars are drawn according to the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

  In FIG. 46, “Red 7 design” indicates that the reel band 321a has two array numbers 3 and 6, the reel band 321b has one array number 12, and the reel band 321c has array number 10 One corresponds. “Blue 7 design” corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The “BAR symbol” corresponds to one of array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The “cherry symbol” has one of array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. These correspond to two. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, In the reel band 321c, five of array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to reels 321c. “Bell 1 design” has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, 18 in the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, three of array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The “bell 2 symbol” corresponds to three of array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two of array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. “Watermelon design” has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321c.・ 4, 11 and 20 correspond. The “definition symbol” corresponds to one of array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The “normal symbol” corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[8. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 as viewed from the front. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed at the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) around the symbol display window 401. Is shown to be placed. A part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and images (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible from the player. It has become. Hereinafter, each of the above-described configurations shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[8-1. Symbol display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , A position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and a “lower stage (or lower position)” (for example, a position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 ”And“ BET 3 ”are BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”, and“ BET 3 ”above) are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, “1” is one bet (the number of bets placed is one) and “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and “3” corresponds to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  An effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol is not arranged on any of the active lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, in principle, a game with three cards is specified or recommended (a specified number of three). However, in the bonus state, a game with two cards is played (the prescribed number is two). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are two lines, a straight line arrangement that rises to the right (upward line to the right) and a straight line pattern that moves to the right (a line that goes down to the right). Specifically, a line (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b in which “BAR symbol-replay symbol-definition symbol” is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47, and “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” are displayed. Only the two lines of the line 623a on which “” is displayed (that is, the lower right) line 623a are effective lines.

  Note that the bet number and the active line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped array in addition to one or a plurality of linear arrays. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

  47. The combination of symbols on the active line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” displayed on the right-down line 623a which is one of the effective lines. Since this symbol combination is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (replaying role), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, a combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” symbol is displayed on the middle line that is not the active line, so that the player can recognize that the player has won the replay. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (re-playing combination), it is necessary to prepare a symbol combination that is difficult to grasp the winning combination at a glance on the active line but difficult to grasp the winning combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401. For other winning combinations, symbol combinations may be prepared in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only with the effective line, the winning combination (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line when viewed in the entire symbol display window 401. It is possible for the player to easily grasp what has been done.

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 47, the display panel 501 is lit around the symbol display window 401 in accordance with the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 (for example, based on the result of the internal lottery or the ART first lottery) (or A plurality of indicators such as a blinking lamp or LED are arranged. Among such a plurality of displays, various displays other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flash) when any trouble or failure (hereinafter referred to as “error”) occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players (including hall attendants). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the error lamp 604, an error is abbreviated and “ERR” is drawn. Since it is difficult to show details of the error only by lighting or blinking with the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the generated error on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

  The section display lamp 605 starts to be turned on (or flashing) when the game number management process described later is started, and is turned off when the game number management process is finished. That is, the section display lamp 605 is a lamp having a role of notifying a player or the like (including a hall attendant) that the game number management process is in progress. Note that the timing at which the section display lamp 605 is turned on (or blinked) may be any timing as long as it is within the game in which the game number management process is started. “In the game where the game number management process is started” means that the game medium (medal, credit data) can be inserted in order to execute the next game after the start lever 210 is operated (game When the result of the game for which the number management process has been started is a replay, this corresponds to the period until an automatic BET state is reached. For example, a plurality of modes including a mode in which a game medium can be immediately inserted when a special role is selected in an internal lottery, and a mode in which a game medium can be loaded in a few seconds after performing so-called freeze processing Of these, any aspect may be determined with a predetermined probability. When the so-called freeze processing is performed and the game medium can be inserted after a few seconds, the player is expected to start the game number management process by performing a liquid crystal effect or a reel effect during the so-called freeze process. You may make it perform a roaring production. The conditions for starting the game number management process will be described later.

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay can be performed (a game can be performed again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606, replay is abbreviated and the letters “REP” are drawn.

  The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts to light (or blink) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet and prompts the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, the characters “STR” are drawn in the vicinity of the start lamp 608 for abbreviated start.

  The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp having a role of prompting the player to bet by continuing to be lit (or flashing) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, the letters “INS” are drawn, omitting the insert (input of game value).

  The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored medals (game value) that can be used by the player when the player inserts medals or pays out medals accompanying game results. This display has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals stored, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the number of stored number display LED 613a on the left side and the number of stored number display LED 613b on the right side). For example, when the upper limit number of medals that can be used by the player is 50, and the upper limit number is stored, “5” is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying “0”, the stored number of medals “50” is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the player.

  The BET lamp 614 (614a to 614c) indicates the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting medals (game value) up to the specified number is performed before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The display is a display device having a role of notifying the bet number (BET number) of game value in one game, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the number of BETs is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, and when the number of BETs is 2, the BET lamp 614b is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the upper BET number is 3 (MAXBET). Then, all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on by further turning on the BET lamp 614a.

  Note that these display units described above are controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

  In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  Further, the indicator such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the indicator can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from “7” (14-segment or 16-segment), or LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, etc. may be used instead of LED. May be.

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying a payout number to notify the player of the payout number of the game value by displaying the payout number when there is a payout of medals (game value) accompanying the game result. It is a display, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the special display LED 612a on the left side and the special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing at which the medals are paid out one by one. In addition, by changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15”, it is possible to notify the player of the game value (medal) payout status in real time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of displaying an instruction function for displaying the instruction content by the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of displaying the number of payouts. The details of the “instruction function” will be described later. In summary, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the occurrence of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 As the instruction function display, information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stop order (reading as the pressing order or the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed, and depending on the content of the display When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

  In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of the instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, lottery related to the instruction function. In addition to the control of the state transition, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, other display means (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display indicate the instruction function of the same content. However, such a display may be controlled by a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510). The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

  More specifically, when the push order small combination (in this example, “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”) is selected as the winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (particularly, Under the control of the CPU 1110), the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content of “appropriate pressing order” corresponding to the selected pressing order small combination. Therefore, the player can recognize the proper pressing order when interpreting the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, information similar to the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that has received the command indicates It is possible to display an image indicating the “push order” on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

  In the slot machine 1, such an instruction function display can be performed in a mode in which any display unit in the display panel 501 also functions (in this example, the special display LED 612 that displays a payout number is displayed. ) That is, with the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, it is possible to display both without confusion. In this embodiment, the payout number display function is also used. However, a display device having other functions may be used, or a display function display dedicated display may be provided.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 is turned on to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has a function for displaying error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 48 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like are mounted. The main board 409 has a function of affecting the game result (acquisition of game value). Specifically, for example, an internal lottery execution means for performing an internal lottery, a bonus game based on the result of the internal lottery Bonus game executing means for executing RT, RT state controlling means for controlling the RT state, ART initial winning lottery means for performing the initial winning lottery, execution of the hell state in which the instruction function display has not been determined or execution of the instruction function display is determined Game state control means for controlling any one of a plurality of advantageous states, instruction function control means for executing control relating to whether or not operation of the instruction function is permitted, and management of the number of games executed by the player A game number management control means for executing a game number management process and a payout control means for paying out medals as a prize based on a winning combination Details of these means will be described later.

  48, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door open detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. And a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and the like. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

  The above-described single-load buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main substrate 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, an error display notifying the abnormality of medal storage is performed by the image display body 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc., and the player or the hall employee is notified that the abnormality has occurred (FIG. 85 to be described later). Equivalent to “Auxiliary storage full error” shown in

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a driving signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. The notification content is displayed on the error lamp 604, special display LED 612, image display 500, etc. to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the “payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. 85 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by a harness, for example, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via corresponding ports. The lighting and display in can be operated.

  The slot machine 1 includes a sub board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (Audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The sub board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. Note that the connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. More specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions and malfunctions of the components of the slot machine 1) are provided. The data can be output to the computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded. However, since the number of sliding frames is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, the combination mode of symbols displayed on the effective line is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated. . Therefore, instead of determining the game result from the combination of symbols displayed on the active line, the game result may be determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

  In this example, the number of effective lines is two. However, when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of effective lines. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per time (9 in this embodiment). In such a case, if the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple active lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”, “cherry symbol”, “replay symbol”, “bell 1 symbol”, “bell 2 symbol”, “watermelon symbol” ”,“ Yizu design ”and“ Principal design ”have already been mentioned, but among them,“ Red 7 design ”,“ Blue 7 design ”and“ BAR design ”are more prominent than other designs. The design is easy and easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped while aiming so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice symbol” and “justice symbol” can be read as “justice” in the form of a circle formed by two symbols of “justice symbol” and “justice symbol”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the vertical direction.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[9-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery execution means and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. A lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. As will be described in detail later, in the slot machine 1, an internal lottery is executed by an internal lottery executing means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

[9-1-1. Outline of instruction function]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described below is assumed to have an instruction function using a push order small combination as an example of a function provided in the gaming machine. In the push order bells 1 to 6, the bell symbol alignment can be displayed only when the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are operated is appropriate. In the gaming machine having the instruction function, the winning of the ART first hit is determined by the ART first hit lottery executed by the ART first hit lottery means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

  When the ART first win lottery is won, the ART game is started. In the ART game, the reel stop according to the instruction is indicated by instructing an appropriate pushing order in which the most medals can be paid out, mainly in the case where the pushing orders 1 to 6 are selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery. Allow the player who performed the operation to win many medals. On the other hand, in the gaming period other than the ART game (non-ART), the above push order is not instructed, so that the medal acquisition in the proper push order can be made uncertain, and the medal for each gaming state. This can make a difference in the expected number of medals and the consumption pace of medals. Such an instruction function is an example of a function provided in the slot machine 1, and detailed processing thereof will be described later.

  Further, supplementing the pressing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (reel 301 stopping order) is "left-middle-right", "left- There are six types: “right-middle”, “middle-left-right”, “middle-right-left”, “right-left-middle”, and “right-middle-left”. In the following description, the respective pressing orders are referred to as “forward pressing”, “clamping pressing”, “middle pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse clamping pressing”, and “reverse pressing”, respectively. Note that “pressing order 123” described in the remarks 1 column of FIG. 49 corresponds to the pressing order (forward pressing) of “left-middle-right”, and “pressing order 132” is “left-right-middle”. “Pressing order 312” corresponds to the “right-left-middle” pressing order (reverse pinching pressing), and “pressing order 213” corresponds to the “middle-left-right” pressing. "Pressing order 321" corresponds to the "right-middle-left" pressing order (reverse pressing), and "Pressing order 231" corresponds to the "middle-right-left" pressing order. Corresponds to (middle reverse pressing).

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a procedure of a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, the left reel 301a is played during a game in which the pressing order is not instructed during a period in which the ART game is not performed (non-ART). For the first time (that is, the first stop operation is performed with respect to the reel stop button 211a) “left press (“ forward press ”or“ squeeze press ”)” is recommended, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are When a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed, for example, by first stopping, it may be possible to take a disadvantageous action for the player, such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery.

  For example, when the winning combination is a winning combination corresponding to a push order small combination (in this example, a pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, The appearance of stoppages is made different depending on the pressing order of 211b and 211c). Such a difference in the appearance of stoppage can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as the winning combination corresponding to “push order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations each associated with an appropriate push order (specifically, “push order bell 1” to “push order bell” shown in FIG. 49). 6 ”, and when the winning role is“ push order bell 1 ”, for example, the forward push (left, middle, right) is equivalent to“ appropriate push order ”) and selected by internal lottery Depending on the combination that is different for each winning combination, operation of multiple types of condition devices is allowed. At this time, under the priority control (for example, “number priority control” or “symbol combination priority control”), the drawing pull-in control for stopping the reel 301 differs according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211. By setting so as to be executed, it is possible to change the mode of the stop appearance based on the pushing order, and as a result, it is also possible to make a difference in the number of payouts.

  Here, “number priority control” means that when a plurality of condition devices are allowed to operate, the payout number at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line) is the largest. This refers to pull-in control that gives priority to a large number of condition devices, and pulls the symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device out of the “drawable symbols” and stops them. In addition, “symbol combination priority control” gives priority to a condition device that maximizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by “drawable symbols” when multiple condition devices are allowed to operate. In addition, it refers to pull-in control in which a symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled onto the effective line and stopped.

  Then, for example, “push order bell 1” with the forward push as “appropriate push order” is selected as the winning combination, and the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is “proper push order (left / middle / right)”. ”Is determined to perform the pull-in control based on the“ number priority control ”described above, and to perform the pull-in control based on the“ design combination number priority control ”described above if the“ unsuitable pressing order ”. At this time, in the case of “appropriate pushing order”, the condition device with the eight winning combinations having the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the eight winning combinations is drawn on the effective line. On the other hand, in the case of “inappropriate pressing order”, the condition device for one-piece combination or the condition device for zero-piece combination is prioritized, and the symbol combination of one-piece combination or zero-piece combination is drawn on the effective line. Thus, when “pushing order bell 1” is selected as a winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in “appropriate pushing order”, eight winning combinations are awarded, while “inappropriate pushing order” When the reel 301 is stopped, it is possible to win a winning combination (one winning combination, zero winning combination) having a smaller number of payouts than the eight winning combination.

The symbols that can be drawn onto the active line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the reel stop button 211 is stopped (specifically, for example, a maximum of four frames). Depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), symbols that can be drawn and symbols that cannot be drawn are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop appearance differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device corresponding to the push timing is also set in advance.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination associated with "appropriate pushing order" is won, the operation of a plurality of condition devices is allowed, and different priority control is performed with respect to the drawing pull-in control of the reel 301. When a game based on “appropriate push order” is performed, a privilege (for example, comparison) that is advantageous to the player than when a game based on “improper push order” is performed. It is possible to stop at a stopping point that can give out a large number of medals.

  Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, other push order small combinations may be prepared separately from the push order bells 1 to 6, or a push order replay combination may be used. When the push order replay combination is used, for example, when the condition device of “lifting lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” shown in FIG. 49 is activated, if the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pushing order, “lifting lip 1 ”Is displayed to shift to a high lip state (for example, from RT1 to RT2), and when the stop operation is performed in an inappropriate pressing order,“ normally maintained lip ”is displayed so that the high lip state is not shifted. It is preferable to make it. However, in this case, regardless of the stop operation order, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed, and the next game is executed and executed without inserting the benefits (game media (medals, credit data)) as a re-game. A privilege to receive a lottery) is granted.

  The above is the outline of the instruction function in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the ART game using the push order bell as described above is an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. The game includes other advantageous game states (for example, a bonus game, an AT game, or an RT game). In addition, the instruction function is not limited to the instruction function using the pressing order. For example, a pressing position (a role that can be changed based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211) can be used. It may be used.

[9-1-2. Types of winning roles]
The lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the RT state, and FIG. 49 shows, as an example of the RT state in the slot machine 1, the general state (RT0), RT1, RT2, RT3, bonus internal state, And the bonus status is shown. In this specification, the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state are described as being included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which neither the bonus game nor the RT is in progress and the bonus flag is not established and is controlled after the bonus game is finished. The bonus internal state is a state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2 to be described later) is won by internal lottery, and a bonus winning establishment state is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2 to be described later) is won by internal lottery, and a transition is made based on the display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus. In FIG. 49, BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses. However, the bonuses that can be installed in the slot machine 1 may be other types, and include RB bonus, single bonus (SB), and the like. May be. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each state is omitted because it is the same as a general gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning probability (or a number) for each winning combination is determined for each RT state, and a lottery prepared in advance corresponding to each RT state. An internal lottery is performed using a table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. A reel stop process is performed. When any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the active line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the medal payout based on the winning combination, the medal payout number may be set to be different depending on the RT state or the number of medals to be played (specified number). At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the specified number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, if a plurality of reel control patterns are to be prepared for one winning combination, A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping points (a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination.

  The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be broadly divided into a bonus combination (BB1, BB2), a small combination (watermelon role, cherry role, bell role), and a replay role (replaying role). If you don't win a role, you call it “out”. Note that “out” is not strictly a winning combination, but in the following, for convenience, it may be included in the winning combination.

  Here, to briefly explain each combination, the “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game. Specifically, “BB1” and “BB2” correspond to the bonus combination. The “replay combination (replay combination)” performs a BET process (a state and process in which the start lever 210 can be operated), which will be described later, without inserting a medal, and the next game can be executed (replay). It is a role. The “small combination” is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the small combination displayed on the active line. As described above, the winning combinations “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” shown in FIG. 49 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. The reason why the number of pushing-out bells is paid out in a plurality of ways in FIG. 49 is that the number of payouts may differ depending on the stop order or stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the “common bell” is a push order unquestionable bell role that can always stop the bell symbol regardless of the push order. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

  For specific roles such as watermelon role, cherry role, and replay role, in addition to normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance replay role (shown as normal maintenance lip in FIG. 49)), special roles (The special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role (shown as special maintenance lip in FIG. 49) are included in the winning role. Details of these special roles will be described later. In the book, a concept including both a normal watermelon role and a special watermelon role is simply referred to as a watermelon role or a watermelon, and similarly, a concept including both a normal cherry role and a special cherry role is simply referred to as a cherry role or cherry. A concept including both a normal maintenance replay role and a special maintenance replay role is simply referred to as a maintenance replay role, a maintenance replay, or a maintenance lip.

  Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out of”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state).

  The push order unrecognized bell pays out 9 cards regardless of the push order, whereas when the push order bell is in an inappropriate push order, one medal is paid out or not paid out. . Therefore, by assigning numbers in this way, when controlled in a bonus state (bonus game), the player's hand-held medals can be increased without substantially reducing.

  In addition, even if one of the winning combinations (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. Stop operation (operation to push reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to stop within the symbol display window 524 (more strictly speaking, the effective lines 623a and 623b) as much as possible. Otherwise, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won, as in the case where “out” is selected, it will be described later. In step S6 of FIG. 50, it is determined that the game result is lost. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination and the rare small combination (watermelon combination, cherry combination) if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (pressing position) is on the effective line. However, for other general small roles (push order bell, common bell) and replay roles, the corresponding symbol combination should be displayed on the active line even if it is stopped at any timing. The symbols are arranged so that they can be played (however, it is necessary to perform a stop operation in an appropriate pressing order for a role requiring a pressing order). In the event that the game result is lost despite winning some winning combination, instead of randomly displaying the symbol combination of “out”, the fact that the winning based on the winning combination has been eliminated The predetermined symbol combination (stop appearance) shown is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopping appearance) displayed at the time of the loss is hereinafter referred to as “zeroing (or zeroing)”.

  In the description of the present embodiment, the expression “bell zero (bell zero)” is used for “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”. The bell-zeroing means that the bells are aligned (strictly speaking, the number of the eight sheets is determined by the stop operation being performed in an improper pushing order when the pushing order bell is determined for each winning combination. This means that the symbol combination (a combination of bells from which a payout is obtained) is not stopped, and another symbol combination is displayed such that the bell combination is eliminated. In the case of such bell zeroing, the bell zeroing point is displayed as a stop point, and a smaller amount of payout (including no payout) than the original bell alignment is performed.

  In addition, in the description related to the present embodiment, the expression “rose” (separated) may be used separately from the above “zero”. “Disjoint” is not a “uniform eye” that makes it easier for the player to recognize the characteristics of the stop appearance, but a stop appearance such as a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols (so-called “soaking eyes”). "Disseminated eyes"). That is, the “separated eyes” is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even the separated eyes are not always lost, so that medals may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Winning form of winning role]
In the winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49, in addition to a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity, a winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected (simultaneous combination) (Winning role) is also included. When the single combination is won, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, when the simultaneous winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when winning the simultaneous winning combination, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as “replay>pocket> bonus” or “replay>bonus> pocket”). Accordingly, the reel stop process is performed while the display of the winning combination symbol combination is allowed, and a bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small roles, or the setting method of the active line, control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combination is won together. Awards are paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a “non-carry-over role” that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game will not be carried over after the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, the medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

  In addition, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won simultaneously, a combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. When a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously elected, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small roles, and a predetermined priority order (for example, “ Reel stop processing is performed in accordance with the winning combination according to the winning combination symbol display according to the priority order (such as “Game> Small> Bonus” or “Replay> Bonus> Small”). Awards are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination state of the bonus combination is carried over until the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. It can be a “carry-over”. Specifically, the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is a “carry-over combination”. Further, the replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are “non-carry-over roles”. In this way, when a “carry-over combination” and a “non-carry-over combination” are simultaneously selected by winning a duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. When the symbol combination corresponding to “carry-over combination” is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of “carry-over combination” is carried over after the next game. However, in such a “next game”, when winning another small role, both the “carry-over” and “other small role” will be in the winning state. Since they are selected at different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

  Note that, in the case of simultaneous winning, it is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop process which combination of symbols corresponding to which winning combination is to be displayed on the active line.

  In the following, the winning roles roughly classified above will be described in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus role]
The winning combinations “BB1” and “BB2” shown in FIG. 49 are bonus combinations. When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is given based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game (BB game) is executed by displaying a symbol combination (a group of “red 7”) corresponding to the condition device “BB1” on the active line. This bonus game is a game in which a player has an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is set to two and is shown in the bonus state of FIG. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. The bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or when the cumulative number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the bonus state is shifted to the general state. Even if the symbol combination “BB1” or “BB2” is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to “BB1” and “BB2” have an arrangement that cannot necessarily be drawn on the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 46). However, “BB1” and “BB2” are carry-over roles that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed (not aligned) in the winning game, the winning establishment state is not determined after the next game. The game is played as a bonus internal state until it is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

  When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order.

[9-1-5. Replay role]
The winning combination “replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (replaying combination). At the time of winning the replay role, the replay condition device is activated, and the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role is allowed on the active line (one of the lines 623a and 623b). Processing (step S5 in FIG. 50) is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the active line, so that it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is complete. Then, in the next game, a bet is made again without inserting a medal or a betting operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay in which a game similar to the previous game is executed again is possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  The replay role includes a maintenance replay role (displayed as “maintenance lip” in FIG. 49), a raise replay role (displayed as “upward lip” in FIG. 49), a lower replay role (displayed as “lower lip” in FIG. 49), There are 7 replay combinations (displayed as “7 aligned lip” in FIG. 49) and 7 aligned fake play combinations (displayed as “7 aligned lip” in FIG. 49). The maintenance replay combination is a replay combination in which the RT state is not shifted and the current RT state is maintained. The up replay role includes the up replay role 1 that can be selected only at RT1, and the up replay role 2 that can be selected only at RT2, and the up replay role 1 functions as a transition role from RT1 to RT2. The raising replay combination 2 functions as a transition combination from RT2 to RT3. The down replay combination is a combination that can be selected only at RT3 and functions as a transition combination from RT3 to RT2. The 7-match replay role is a replay role that can be selected only at RT3. When the 7-match replay role is selected at RT3, it functions as a role on which the ART game is added. The 7-match fake play role is a replay role that is selected only at RT3 as in the case of the 7-match replay role, and the ART game is not added even if selected by the internal lottery.

  The maintenance replay role can be selected independently in the internal lottery for both the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role. The seven complete fake play combinations are not selected independently in the internal lottery, and are always selected simultaneously with the normal maintenance replay combination.

  When “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” which is a simultaneous winning combination of the raising replay role 1 and the normal maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pushed in the order of “right-middle-left”. When the stop operation is performed by (reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and other pressing orders (forward pressing, pinching pressing, reverse pinching pressing, middle forward pressing, middle reverse pressing) ), The symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

  When “raising lip 2 + normal maintenance lip”, which is a simultaneous winning combination of the raising replay role 2 and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pushed in the order of “right-left-middle”. When the stop operation is performed with (reverse pinching push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lifted replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, and the other push order (forward push, pinch push, middle forward push, reverse push, middle reverse push) ), The symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

  When “lower lip + normal maintenance lip”, which is a simultaneous winning combination of the lower replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “middle-left-right” ( When the stop operation is performed in the middle order press), the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed on the active line, and in the other press order (forward press, pinch push, reverse pinch push, reverse push, middle reverse push) When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

  When “seven matching lip + normal maintenance lip”, which is a simultaneous winning combination of the seven-match replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pushed “right-middle-left”. When the stop operation is performed in order (reverse pressing) and at an appropriate timing (timing that 7 symbols can be pulled in), the symbol combination corresponding to the 7 replays (7 symbols) is displayed on the active line, otherwise If the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing (forward press, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push), or the reverse push is not performed at an inappropriate timing, it corresponds to the maintenance replay role. The symbol combination is displayed on the active line.

  When “7 complete fake lips + normal maintenance lip”, which is a simultaneous winning combination of 7 complete fake play and normal maintenance replay, is selected by internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is “right-middle-left”. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order (reverse pressing), the symbol combination (7th zero) corresponding to 7 fake play roles is displayed on the active line, and the other pressing order (forward pressing, pinching pressing, reverse pinching) When the stop operation is performed by pressing, middle forward pressing, or middle reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

  A feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that it is not necessary to spend a new medal (add a new medal) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, for example, there is little penalty for the hole. Therefore, the slot machine 1 has a probability of winning about once every 6 to 7 times in the normal state (general state). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are uniformly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used for the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols not constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) arranged between the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to one to a maximum of four), It is possible to make it possible to align the pattern combination corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority order of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”, the replay role condition device and other roles (small role and bonus role) Even if the condition device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations corresponding to other combinations are not stopped and displayed.

[9-1-6. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. This bell role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In this embodiment, in addition to the above-described push order bell 1 to push order bell 6, there is a common bell whose push order is not required as the bell combination. When a common bell is selected in the internal lottery, the combination of bell symbols is displayed on the active line regardless of the order in which the reel stop button 211 is operated.

[9-1-6-1. Push order unquestionable bell]
First, a push order unquestionable bell (common bell) in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

  When the “push order unquestioned bell” shown in FIG. 49 is selected as the winning combination, any corresponding symbol combination is always stopped on the effective line regardless of the reel push order and push timing. The condition device is activated. Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, regardless of the stop order and stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed to win the bell combination. A medal payout (eight) according to the award is given as a privilege.

[9-1-6-2. Push order bell]
Next, a description will be given of a push order bell in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals to be paid out based on the win) can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

  The winning combination “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” shown in FIG. 49 is a push order bell winning combination prepared mainly to be able to reliably give a privilege to a player mainly in an ART game. . As described above, each of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is associated with any of the six proper push orders (see FIG. 49).

  In FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are equal to each other, and when added together, the win probability of “push order bell” is 20478/65536. The winning probabilities of “order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” may be arbitrarily assigned under the condition satisfying the above summed value. In this way, it is not limited to being able to equally distribute the winning probabilities for the six appropriate pushing orders in the “pushing order bell” (each winning probability for the six choice bells can be made equal). It is possible to make it difficult to select the proper pressing order. In such a case, in the normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a for the first time, it is possible to suppress the rate of winning the push order bell, and to reduce the payout rate in the normal game, etc. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

  According to FIG. 49, “push order bell 1” is the winning combination of the push order bell that makes the forward push the proper push order, and “push order bell 2” is the push order that makes the pinch push the proper push order. The winning role of the bell role, “push order bell 3” is the winning role of the push order bell role that the pinch push is the proper push order, and “push order bell 4” is the proper push order as the push order bell "Push order bell 5" is a winning combination of push order bells with the reverse push being the proper push order, and "Push order bell 6" is the proper middle reverse push It is a winning combination of the push order bell role. Therefore, the “push order bell” in the present embodiment is a so-called “six choice bell” in which the proper push order is divided into six ways. Of course, such an appropriate push order can be set freely within a predetermined limit at the design stage of the gaming machine.

  As described above, the push order bells “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” pay out eight medals as if they won the bell role only when the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order. If the stop operation is performed in an improper pressing order, “Bell Zero” will be displayed on the active line, and there will be fewer benefits (one or (0 medal payout).

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is recommended that the left push (forward push or pinch push) be performed in a non-ART state that is not an ART state. Therefore, when a game according to the recommended procedure is performed in a non-ART state, a push order bell (specifically, push order bell 1 to push order) other than the left push (forward push or pinch push) is set to an appropriate push order. Even if Bell 6) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the Bell combination cannot be displayed on the active line. However, in the case of an ART game, an appropriate push order is instructed, and a stop operation according to the contents of the instruction is permitted, so that it becomes possible to easily win a bell role when a push order bell is won. In the case of non-ART, if the player has obtained a medal illegally by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure, the entire medal payout will be made by taking measures such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery. The expected value may be adjusted appropriately.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, the player may perform a stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order when a specific pressing order is not a recommended procedure except when an instruction function is displayed such as during an ART game. Since there is no recommended procedure, the adjustment (measures such as temporary suspension of the ART lottery) as described above is not necessary. It becomes. In the case where a specific pressing order is not a recommended procedure, it is desirable that the winning probabilities for each pressing order in the pressing order small combination are the same. By making the winning probabilities the same for each push order, the expected value of the ball can be equalized regardless of the push order, so that the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind in the preferred push order. it can.

[9-1-7. Rare small role]
Rare small roles as winning roles include a watermelon role and a cherry role. The watermelon combination is a winning combination in which medals can be paid out (five) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line. The cherry combination is a winning combination in which medals can be paid out (two) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line.

[9-1-8. Special role]
As described above, the watermelon role, cherry role, and maintenance replay role include the special watermelon role, special cherry role, and special maintenance replay role in addition to the normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, and normal maintenance replay role, respectively. Yes. If the special watermelon, special cherry, or special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state described later, the transition destination from the hell state is advantageous. A to any of advantageous states E. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role function as an opportunity to shift to the advantageous state (termination of the hell state). The determination probability of the transition destination when these special roles are selected by the internal lottery in the hell state will be described later. A special watermelon role, special cherry role or special maintenance replay role is selected by an internal lottery when the game state related to execution of the instruction function display is any of the advantageous states A to E. Even if the normal watermelon combination, the normal cherry combination, or the normal maintenance replay combination is selected, the same processing is performed. That is, the special role is a role that exhibits a function different from that of the normal role only in the hell state. Note that the game state related to execution of the instruction function display includes whether or not the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and the instruction function display is executed when execution of the instruction function display is confirmed. It refers to multiple game states with different conditions.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to any one of the settings 1 to 6 by the hall personnel, and for each setting, BB1, “BB1 + normal watermelon”, “BB1 + normal cherry” , BB2, "BB2 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", normal watermelon, normal cherry, push bell 1-6, common bell, normal maintenance lip, "raise lip 1 + normal lip", "raise lip 2+ normal maintenance The winning probabilities for “Lip”, “Lower Lip + Normally Maintained Lip”, “7 Complete Lip + Normally Maintained Lip”, and “7 Completed Flip + Normally Maintained Lip” are different. On the other hand, the winning probabilities for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) are common in settings 1 to 6, and even if the setting is changed, the winning probability for special roles is not changed. In other words, the winning probability of the winning combination that functions as a trigger for the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state is the common probability for all settings. However, the winning probability of special watermelon, the winning probability of special cherry and the winning probability of special maintenance lip may be the same in settings 1-6, the winning probability of special watermelon, the winning probability of special cherry and the winning probability of special maintenance lip Although different for each setting, the synthesis probabilities of the special watermelon, special cherry, and special maintenance lip may be common to the settings 1 to 6. Although not shown in FIG. 49, so-called bonus combinations such as BB1 may be divided into special BB1 combination and normal BB1 combination. For example, in FIG. 49, the probability that the BB1 role is selected is 44/65536. However, when the special BB1 role is divided into the normal BB1 role, for example, the probability that the special BB1 role is selected is 33/65536. And the probability of selecting the normal BB1 combination can be 11/65536. In this case, if all settings are common, the probability that BB1 is selected for each setting is generally different. Therefore, the probability that the special BB1 role is selected is common to all settings, and the normal BB1 role is selected. It is advisable to provide a range in the payout rate by providing a setting difference in the probability of selecting a ball.

  Further, the symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

  For example, a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or replay combination) may be set, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is on the active line only when the reel 301 is stopped in an appropriate pushing order. A displayed push order replay combination may be provided.

  Further, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination (bell combination in the present embodiment) is displayed on the active line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop button 211 is operated to stop. Instead of this, a pushing position small combination determined based on the timing when the reel stop button 211 is stopped may be prepared. Although a detailed description is omitted, the push position small combination means when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (press position) and when it is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. It is a small role that shows different winning modes. When such a push position small combination is mounted, an instruction is given so that the player can easily recognize an appropriate push position in the ART game, so that when the push position small combination is won, It is possible for the player to easily win the corresponding role and to acquire many medals.

  The player of the slot machine 1 is selected by an internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 49), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts, the arrangement of symbols (FIG. 46), and the like. In some cases, it is possible to find a gaming method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is temporarily referred to as “maximum efficiency hitting method”. When playing a game with maximum efficiency, depending on the stop position of the reel, it is difficult to draw the combination of symbols with the most payouts corresponding to the winning combination on the effective line (watermelon role, cherry role) , Chances of winning, etc.) were stopped by pressing one of the reel stop buttons 211 at a specific timing so as to achieve the maximum payout in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By pressing the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol form, a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn and a large number of payouts are obtained. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a gaming method that suppresses the missed winning combination as much as possible.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 50 is an example of a main routine showing a general procedure for one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices described above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, restore the state before the power was turned off. Execute. When backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. Note that when the slot machine 1 is a three-sheet dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals, the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function process, not only the winning of the ART game and its start are determined, but also the ART navigation is executed to teach (instruct) the player in the order of pressing during the ART game. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central control related to the instruction function (ART first lottery, determination of the number of ART games, execution of ART game, transition of RT state, indication function display, etc.). To do. On the other hand, auxiliary control related to the instruction function (such as navigation display on the image display body 500) is managed by the sub-board 510. Even in such a case, the navigation that the sub-board 510 displays on the image display body 500 or the like. The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display contents of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display contents of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display contents of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 and the like are a pair. It is not limited to one correspondence relationship, and may be a one-to-n correspondence relationship (plural patterns). That is, when some instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub board 510 performs navigation display in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display for the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display need not be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may determine which display mode is used for navigation display, or the main board 409 may specify. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the main board 409 may perform all processing related to instruction function processing.

  Further, in the instruction function process in step S31 shown in this example, the processing content related to the ART instruction function is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed every time the game is executed, the ART first lottery performed based on the result of the internal lottery process is performed every time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process is ended before the reel rotation process in step S4 described in the next stage is started.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in a stopped state, the winning combination symbols are aligned on the “active line” (the symbol corresponding to any winning combination). Based on whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining the winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating “display content displayed on the effective line (pattern combination mode)” and “symbol combination allowed to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination” Judge the winning role. In addition, the determination process in step S6 may be determined based only on “display contents displayed on the effective line (design combination)”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a line ("downward-downward line 623a") on which "bell symbol-replay symbol-bell symbol" shown in FIG. Two lines of the line (upward right line 623b) in which is displayed are “effective lines”. However, the number of active lines is not limited to this.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. In addition, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination accompanied by a change in the RT state, such as 2 types BB, each of the RT state change (RT state change shown in FIG. 49) and replay The execution of various game benefits is executed by the above.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process) to step S4 (reel rotation process) are internal processes triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[10-1. Start processing]
FIG. 51 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to a MAX bet (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a specified number of three games, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a two specified number of games). It is assumed that it is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 that becomes a MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is 3, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines, and an effective line indicating this Turn on the lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Note that the timing for extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), for example, in the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON. In addition, the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag (RT state flag) that is ON in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. As game state flags, it is assumed that flags corresponding to the RT state are prepared, for example, a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus medium flag are in the OFF state, the general state flag is always turned ON.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (actuated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 50 described above).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 50, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 51, this instruction function process may be executed as a part of the flag process in step S107 in FIG. In this case, the wait timer may be executed until the timer expires.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination at the predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, the instruction contents of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). It should be noted that the command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command compiled as appropriate.

  Further, a command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of performing the instruction function process in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command mode. . That is, the winning combinations are grouped based on their types, the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, etc., and the main group including the winning combination can be identified for the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. A command can be transmitted from the substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate (eg, the sub-substrate 510). Note that the classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations is not limited to the above example, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the presence / absence of the push order is added to the classification criteria, all the bell roles (push order bell 1 to push order bell 6) included in the push order bell are grouped into a common bell role as a push order unquestioned bell. By making the different groups, the role of the bell can be divided into groups depending on whether or not they are pushed. At this time, the bell role is divided into a push order bell group and a push order unquestionable bell group. The same applies to the replay combination. For example, the replay combination may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (the push order is not asked). Further, all winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence / absence of the pressing order. In such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a group having a pressing order or a group having no pressing order. Further, instead of grouping the winning combination, condition devices based on the winning combination may be grouped. Hereinafter, a command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

  First, for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, the command that can understand all the breakdowns of the grouped winning combination (a command capable of so-called “complete navigation”). May be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination is selected and what push order, the reel stop method is advantageous for the player. Navigation display (so-called “complete navigation”) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can understand a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be instructed). "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of information regarding the selected winning combination, and therefore, a navigation display (for example, only the first stop) that can partially indicate a reel stop method advantageous to the player. So-called “partial navigation” can be displayed.

  In addition, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command that does not know the breakdown of the grouped winning combination may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize, based on the group indicated by the command, that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed. , I can not recognize any more information. For example, although it is understood that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, the proper push order and the specific breakdown of the winning combination ("Push order bell 1" to "Push order bell 6" It can be recognized to the extent that it is not known. Note that a command for notifying such a winning combination grouped when such instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “conditional device command”.

  Furthermore, when the instruction function display is executed, the small roles to be grouped do not need to be limited to the push order bell, and may be grouped including other combinations (for example, push order replay). . In other words, in this case, even when the push order bell is selected as the winning combination, or when another combination is selected, if the proper push order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. Means. In addition, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the pressing order bell, and it may be possible to group other roles as well. In the peripheral board (for example, sub-board 510) that has received the command, the winning combination type (whether other role or bell) cannot be determined, and the winning combination is instructed in a state unrelated to the instruction function display. (For example, when the instruction function is not executed, it is not possible to display the navigation indicating that the other combination is won on the image display body 500). It is desirable to send a command by grouping for each type of push order small combinations, such as separate (replay).

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command notifying the grouped winning combinations in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently determine the winning combination and its winning combination. Judgment of the pressing order can be suppressed.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[10-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 to the power of 16 = 65536 random numbers). In the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random values are extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, when a random value corresponding to the winning combination “BB1” is selected from random numbers in the extraction range (from “0” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the result of the internal lottery Means that “BB1 has been won”, and BB1, which is a conditional device, is processed as an information command in the game. In addition, when this is used, the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB1. In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is [total number of random values corresponding to BB1 / total number of random values in the extraction range] of 384/65536.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single combination (for example, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, maintenance replay) for winning only one winning combination is prepared. However, as described above, in addition to such a single combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected may be prepared. And when preparing such a duplicate combination, the winning value of the overlapping combination is also included in the above winning value.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, the single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination for one extracted random value, and the simultaneous winning combination is a plurality (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Corresponds. In other words, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. At this time, condition devices corresponding to each of the winning combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, in fact, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device are all It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if a replay combination and a bonus combination are won at the same time, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order or pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always replayed. The symbol combination is stopped.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the winning value of the push order unrecognized bell (common bell) that can be expected to win (or establish) without depending on the push timing and push order in the stop operation occupies the entire extraction range. ing. In the present embodiment, when a replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming medals automatically, and when the push order unquestioned bell wins, eight medals are paid out. Therefore, when a bonus game is executed, a large number of medals are paid out during the bonus game execution period (during the bonus).

  As can be seen from FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 of this example, a special role (special watermelon, special cherry) that functions as a transition trigger from the hell state to any of the advantageous states A to E is provided. , Special maintenance lip) is judged using an internal lottery random value used in internal lottery (condition device lottery). Therefore, it is not necessary to use a new random value different from the internal lottery random value. Therefore, it is possible to create new game characteristics using the hell state and the advantageous state while improving the efficiency of the control burden, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[10-3. RT state control processing]
Below, the control process of RT state performed in the slot machine 1 is demonstrated.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control process]
FIG. 52 is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. The RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM clear), the general state (RT0) is entered. The replay synthesis probability in the general state (maintenance replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, 7-match replay role, and 7-match fake play role synthesis probability) is about 1 / 7.3. . In such a general state, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals betted by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. . That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases with the execution of the game by the player. In FIG. 52, the replay synthesis probability is expressed as RP synthesis probability.

  In the general state, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in the proper order and any of the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, and the zero bell is not operated. When the zero point is displayed on the active line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from the general state to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT1 is about 1 / 7.3. In such RT1, when the game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period, as in the general state. More.

  In RT1, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of raising lip 1 is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 moves from RT1 to RT2. Control as follows. When the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on the condition that the ART first lottery is won, and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, a general term for a game during a basic ART, a special zone described later, and a special zone preparation is referred to as an ART game. However, if the player does not win the first lottery for the ART and shifts from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game will not be entered, and the instruction function display and the number of ART games to be described later will not be added. However, when it is controlled to a high replay probability state (e.g., equivalent to RT2 in this example) when the first lottery for the ART is not won, the indication function display does not operate when the push order bell is won. However, if the payout rate exceeds “1”, the game number management process described above may be started. This is because a state where the payout rate exceeds “1” is advantageous to the player.

  During the ART game, an ART game is executed in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games (the instruction function display can be executed continuously over a plurality of games). Specifically, when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 performs control so that an instruction function display described later is performed. Further, the sub-board 510 is also controlled so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. The replay synthesis probability at RT2 is about 1 / 1.6. In such RT2, when a game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within the certain period. That is, RT2 where the instruction function is displayed is a state in which the number of medals increases with the execution of the game by the player. However, the ART game is set to 50 games per shot, and if the lottery is not won by adding the number of ART games to be described later, the game ends in 50 games. Specifically, during the ART game, when the number of ART games is added and the lottery is won, the number of ART games is increased, and the ART game continues until the number of ART games added in addition to the above 50 games is consumed, which will be described later. The instruction function is displayed. On the other hand, if the number of ART games is not added and the lottery is not won, the instruction function display described later is performed from the start of the basic ART game until 50 games are consumed. finish. At the same time, the display by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is also ended. When the display by the sub board 510 in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function is finished, even if any of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is displayed. Appropriate stop operation sequence is not specified. Then, when the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game is over, RT2 is maintained until the 0th bell zero is displayed on the active line, so that the right to execute the replay game is given frequently, but the instruction function display is displayed. It will not be done.

  Probabilistically, “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are not selected in the internal lottery during the ART game, and the designated function number (without the instruction function display being performed once) ( If the number of ART games is not selected for the lottery, 50 games may be consumed, and if the number of ART games is selected for the lottery, the sum of 50 games and the number of added games may be consumed. In such a case, even if the prescribed number of games is exhausted, the ART game continues until the instruction function display is performed, and when the instruction function display is performed once, the ART game is ended. It is configured.

  In this example, one shot of the ART game is set to 50 games, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to 50 games.

  In this example, the number of games that the ART game continues until the prescribed number of games such as 50 games is exhausted is performed. You may make it perform management of the number of sheets in which an ART game continues.

  During the basic ART, when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, an appropriate stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with this instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raising Lip 2 is displayed, the process proceeds to RT3). However, although any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, If the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with the instruction function display, the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line, and the process shifts from RT2 to RT1 under the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

  In RT2, when “up lip 2 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, control is performed so as to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, the zone becomes a specialized zone, and an ART game is added with a high probability (details will be described later). Also in this RT3, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays an instruction function to be described later when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. To be controlled. Further, the sub-board 510 is also controlled so that display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

  The specialized zone ends with 5 games. Specifically, when “down lip + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, if the game is in the specialized zone (if 5 games have not been digested), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay role is It controls so that the instruction | indication function display mentioned later is performed so that it may be displayed. On the other hand, when “down lip + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been consumed since the start of the special zone, the symbol combination corresponding to the down replay role is displayed. Then, control is performed so that the instruction function display described later is performed (both are shown in FIG. 49). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT3 to RT2. In addition, when the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line in RT3, the CPU 1110 controls the RT state to shift from RT3 to RT1. The replay synthesis probability in RT3 is about 1 / 1.6. When the symbol combination corresponding to the lowering replay combination has not been displayed even though 5 games have been digested since the start of the specialized zone, the basic ART game is controlled under the RT state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high probability state. Therefore, during special zone or special zone preparation, the reel stop button is selected when any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery as in the basic ART. The proper stop operation order 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, and as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT3. When the stop button 211 is operated and the zero bell zero is displayed on the active line, the process proceeds to RT1.

  In any of the general states, RT1, RT2, and RT3, if the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (bonus is established), the bonus is in the middle. Inside bonus is a state in which a bonus flag has been established but a bonus game has not yet started. That is, when a bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. In the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination in the game won in the internal lottery is an effective line. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed in the next game, it continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. The replay synthesis probability inside the bonus is about 7.3. When the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the active line in the inside of the bonus (when the bonus is won), the bonus game is started and the bonus game is in progress. During such a bonus, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals that a player bets to execute the game within the certain period. . When the bonus game ends, the game returns to the general state.

  Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to any one of the general state (RT0 state), RT1 state, RT2 state, RT3 state, bonus internal state, and bonus state. The On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an instruction function, and the execution of an ART game in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games is basically in such an RT state. It is controlled by a separate system. As described above, an ART game with such an instruction function is mainly executed in RT2 or RT3. However, if an ART game execution condition is satisfied (for example, an ART execution lottery is won), in any RT state. An ART game can be executed. However, this is not the case when there is a conflict with rules and the like. For example, it is assumed that an ART game cannot be executed in a bonus state. Hereinafter, the state control process related to the instruction function will be described in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following lottery is performed as a lottery related to ART. First, as a lottery related to ART performed in a normal gaming state (Hell state, advantageous state A to advantageous state D) which is neither an ART game nor a bonus, there are an ART initial winning lottery and an ART initial winning lottery state transfer lottery. In addition, as lotteries related to ART performed during an ART game (during basic ART, special zone, or special zone preparation), there are a special zone lottery and an ART game number extra lottery. In addition, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 is used as a lottery state related to ART in a normal gaming state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 in which no instruction function is generated) that is neither an ART game nor a bonus. Control to one of a plurality of lottery states (advantageous state A to advantageous state D) with different degrees of advantage of the winning lottery, and when there is neither a normal gaming state nor a bonus (during an ART game) It is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (ART medium low probability state, ART medium high probability state, special zone, special zone preparation) in which the degree of advantage of the lottery is different.

  The hell state is a state in which the operation of the instruction function is not determined, and when a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state, the state shifts to one of the advantageous states A to E. In these advantageous states A to E, The operation of the instruction function is always confirmed once. In addition, when one game is executed in the hell state, the winning probability (probability of transition to the advantageous state E) of the ART game executed for 50 games is a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special) in the internal lottery. This is a combined probability of the probability that the maintenance replay role is selected and the probability that the transfer destination is determined to be in the advantageous state E in the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) when the special role is selected in the internal lottery. .

  During the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to any one of an ART medium low probability state, an ART medium high probability state, a specialized zone preparation state, and a specialized zone state. A collective term for the ART low probability state, the ART high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state is referred to as an ART lottery state. The ART low probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or ART game number addition lottery performed when not normal (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively low probability. The ART medium high probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery performed when not normal (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively high probability. The special zone preparation state is the lottery state when the special zone has been won but the special zone has not yet started (that is, the special zone lottery has been won but the RT state has not yet been transferred to RT3. State). The special zone state is a lottery state in the special zone.

  As described above, the special zone state and the special zone preparation state are both lottery states related to the ART that is controlled when the special zone lottery is won in the low probability state of the ART or the high probability state of the ART. is there. In addition, the CPU 1110 is in the ART lottery state during the basic ART (the lottery state relating to ART which is not in the special zone or the special zone preparation) only when it is controlled to the ART medium low probability state and the ART medium high probability state. Is controlled based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery during the ART, which of the above-mentioned ART medium low probability state and ART medium high probability state is controlled. This lottery state transfer lottery during ART is performed using an ART lottery state transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 68 to be described later. In the ART medium / low probability state, the transfer lottery to the ART medium / high probability state is performed with the probability corresponding to the condition device that has been operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium / high probability state, the transfer lottery to the ART medium / low probability state is performed with the probability corresponding to the condition device that has been operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the lottery state transition lottery during ART is as shown in FIG.

  The specific winning probability in the special zone lottery is as shown in FIG. The special zone lottery is performed every game according to the condition device that is activated as a result of the lottery state during the ART and the internal lottery when it is not normal. When the special zone lottery is won, the reel stop button 211 is pushed in the order of “Right-Left-Middle” (reverse) when “Rip Up 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip” is selected in the internal lottery in subsequent games. The instruction function display is performed by the CPU 1110 so as to be stopped by the pinch push), and the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main substrate 409 is performed by the sub substrate 510. When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, the RT state shifts from RT2 to RT3, and the specialized zone is started. The However, the present embodiment is configured so that a special zone can be won only when watermelon, cherry, or off is selected in the internal lottery in the low probability state of ART or the high probability state of ART. Therefore, in the special zone state and the special zone preparation state, the special zone lottery result is always non-winning. The specialized zone state ends with 5 games as described above. Thereafter, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the RT3 is shifted to RT2, and the lottery state during ART at this time is controlled to a high probability state.

  The lottery with the number of ART games added is performed only when the special zone lottery is not won according to the lottery state during the ART and the condition device operated as a result of the internal lottery. The ART game number extra lottery includes an extra decision lottery that determines whether or not to add an ART game number, and an extra game that determines the number of games to be added when it is decided to add an ART game number. Number determination lottery is included. The specific winning probability in the extra determination lottery is as shown in FIG. Further, specific winning probabilities in the extra game number determination lottery are as shown in FIGS.

  The additional game number determination lottery is a lottery performed when the additional determination lottery is won, and the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is shown in FIG. The number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, when the ART is in a high probability state, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 64 described later. Similarly, when in the special zone, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 65 described later, and when the special zone is being prepared, FIG. 66 described later is used. Thus, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery.

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 50, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table), the main board. When the central processing of the instruction function processing is performed by 409 and the generation of an instruction is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) instructs the instruction function of the same content. Can be displayed on other displays or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Note that the display mode of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but both displays are required to be display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining a rough process flow of the instruction function process. In FIG. 53, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processes executed on the main board 409 and a series of processes executed on the sub board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are shown. ing. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of processing related to generation of an instruction function executed by the main board 409 in the instruction function processing shown in FIG. Here, first, an overview of the instruction function process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In [10-3-4] and after, processes related to the generation of the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 61 and the like. Including the game flow.

  Note that various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function process. These flags are used in the memory in the board that executes the instruction function process (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510). This is an internal flag to be held, and the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. In addition, when a flag with the same name is used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), it is basically assumed that these internal flags have a common data format. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a command signal or the like.

  In addition to the internal flag, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the board memory (for example, the RAM 1114 in the case of the main board 409 and the sub board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

  First, in step S61 in FIG. 53, the main board 409 executes processing related to whether or not to generate an instruction function (processing related to generation of the instruction function). More specifically, the winning of the first lottery for the ART is determined, whether the ART game can be started and the number of continued ART games are determined.

  When it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function, the main board 409 displays the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game on the special display LED 612. Processing is performed (step S62). By this instruction function display, it is possible to indicate an appropriate stop order of the push order small combinations established during ART, or to indicate that a predetermined symbol should be arranged in a predetermined stop order.

  In the case of a game in which it is determined that the main board 409 does not need to perform the instruction function display in step S61, the specific instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

  The main board 409 performs the instruction function display in step S62 based on the result of the process related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, while the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display is obtained by a command or the like. Transmit to a peripheral board (for example, sub board 510) (instruction information command). When the instruction function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by an instruction information command, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary to determine whether the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed on the receiving side. In this way, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) not only can recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also can display the instruction function display. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

  Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 53 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function process shown in FIG. 53, the process related to generation of the instruction function (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processes (specifically, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) Are not intended to limit the execution timing of the processes in step S62 and steps S63 to S65.

  First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) performs (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the instruction function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), instruction generation effect processing is performed as processing in step S64. Further, when it is determined in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or has not been performed) in the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) (NO in step S63), the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) is instructed as processing in step S65. Perform function-related processing.

  The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is an “instruction generation effect” for instructing the player in the image display 500 or other display device, etc., in order to stop the reel 301, the stop position (target pattern, that is, the timing of the stop operation), or the like. Is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation or the like. In addition, the instruction content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display process. For example, although the instruction content indicating “forward press” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is not “reverse press”. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward press” and indicates that “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” as an instruction based on the instruction generation effect content, Even when the reel 301b to be stopped is not instructed, it is not allowed. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, but the indication function indication is an indication of the pressing location. It is also applied when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content display indicates that the special display LED 612 indicates that “all seven reels should aim for the red 7 symbol”, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol”. It is not allowed to be "aiming at a red 7 symbol" with only some reels.

  In addition, as for the specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect forms are conventionally known, such as displaying the order of pushing and symbols on the liquid crystal screen, or lighting the LED associated with each of the reels 301a to 301c. Any one or combination thereof may be used.

  The instruction function related processing in step S65 relates to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game that is not in ART or a game that is won in the push order unrecognized winning combination even in ART). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen. In addition, among the above “Push Order Unrecognized Winners”, depending on the game method, not only the winning combination that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of games when playing with any game method, such as Push Order Unquestioned Bell. Some of the winning roles are such that the maximum number of payouts cannot be expected or the payout cannot be obtained. More specifically, not only a winning combination (for example, a watermelon role) that can be acquired when a game is played with a gaming method that can expect the maximum payout (equivalent to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency hitting method”) is included. A winning combination (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side on the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the watermelon role is prepared, which can not be obtained when playing with `` maximum efficiency batting method '', It is a one-piece combination that is determined to be a winning when the symbol combination is stopped, and so-called a chance combination) is also included.

  The instruction function process ends when the processes of steps S61 to S65 described above are performed. Below, each process (step S61-step S65) performed as an instruction | indication function process by CPU1110 of the main board | substrate 409 is demonstrated in detail.

[10-3-4. Processing related to generation of instruction function]
The flow of the game including the process related to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 in FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not the game number management flag is ON. The game number management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the game number management process is being performed. When the game number management flag is ON, the game number management process is being performed (that is, the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and the withdrawal state). Any of the above), and when it is OFF, it means that the game number management process is not being performed (that is, a hell state). If the game number management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, the number of games executed during the game number management process (the number of games executed by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is counted. Specifically, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S603.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and the pullback state are prepared as the state during the game number management process, and controlled to one of these advantageous states.

  Here, an outline of each of the advantageous states A and the advantageous states E to the advantageous state E will be briefly described. The advantageous state A is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the instruction function display is performed once in the game after the 32 games are executed, the advantageous state A ends and the state is shifted to the hell state. . The advantageous state B is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and after the 32 games are executed, the state is shifted to an advantageous state E described later. The advantageous state C is a state in which 32 games are set as a ceiling, and when the 32 games are executed, the next game is shifted to an advantageous state D described later. In the advantageous state D, 10 games are set as chance zones (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), and during the 10 games as CZ, a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role) is selected by internal lottery. When it is issued, it shifts to the advantageous state E from the next game with a probability of 100%, and when one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery, the probability is one fourth. Then, the game is shifted to the advantageous state E from the next game. The advantageous state E is a state in which the instruction function flag is set to ON and the execution of the ART game is allowed. The advantageous state E during the transition from the RT state to RT2 and the execution of the ART game and the advantageous state E include. Also, in this advantageous state E, at least the game number counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value, and the instruction function continuously operates over the specified number of games (in this example, “50 games + α” (α is the number of added games)). However, if the prescribed number of ART games is consumed, the game ends unless the number of ART games is added. In addition, after the advantageous state E ends, as long as the game number management flag is ON (as long as the game number counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value), control is performed to a pull-back state A or a pull-back state B described later.

  Note that, in this example, the instruction function display is not performed once, and the advantageous state does not end and the state does not shift to the hell state. However, the instruction function is displayed once in the advantageous game state (especially the advantageous state A) of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and during the game number management process. Even when it is not, if the bonus combination that increases the so-called medal is selected by internal lottery, the instruction function display may not be performed as a special process (special process execution means).

*
By the way, in the conventional slot machine, when the ART first lottery is won, a precursor game is performed over a plurality of games (for example, 32 games), and the ART game is often executed after the precursor game is executed. It was. In such a conventional slot machine, even if the first lottery for the ART is not won, there is a possibility that the first lottery for the ART may be won (for example, a rare small part is selected in the internal lottery). Foreplay game is executed). In other words, after the precursor game is executed, the ART game may be executed or not executed. The player can be attracted to the precursor game by executing an expectation effect during the precursor game that can give the player the expectation of winning the first lottery for the ART.

*
However, in such a conventional slot machine, if the pre-game is executed, the lottery given to the player is great when the ART first lottery is not won. In particular, if the result of the ART first win lottery is not clearly shown until the set precursor game is exhausted, the player must execute the precursor game in the possibility that the ART first win lottery is not won. In the case of not having won the first lottery for ART, there is a significant decrease in interest. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where in the hell state the ART first win lottery is won and the transition destination is determined to be one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state C (that is, the ceiling game (predictor game)). When the transition destination is determined in the advantageous state to be set), the instruction function display is always activated once when the set ceiling game is consumed. As a result, there is no possibility that the player will be forced to execute the precursor game while there is a possibility that the ART first win lottery has not been won. Will be executed. In addition, since the degree of profit for the player after the sign game is digested differs depending on the advantageous state, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest without losing the significance of the sign game. . In this example, when the set ceiling game (a precursor game) is digested, the instruction function display is always operated once. However, the operation of the instruction function display is not necessarily set. It is not limited to the one that is only performed when the ceiling game is digested. For example, when the instruction function display is executed, the instruction function display may be activated in the middle of the precursor game unless the result of the ART first lottery drawing can be grasped. “A mode in which the result of the ART initial winning lottery can be grasped when the instruction function display is executed” means that the instruction function is performed in the middle of the precursor game when the number of operation of the instruction function display is determined once during the precursor game For example, when the display is activated, it is possible to grasp that the ART game is not executed at that time.

  As described above, the hell state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and the advantageous state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed. However, execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed in the retracted state. Therefore, when defining the hell state and the non-hell state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E, pullback state A, and pullback state B), the state in which execution of the instruction function display cannot be permitted is the hell state. The state in which the execution of the instruction function display can be permitted is the non-hell state.

  Further, in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, and the advantageous state C of this example, 32 games are set as the ceiling, but it is needless to say that the ceiling is not limited to 32 games. The number of games is preferably set to 32 games or less.

  Further, in the advantageous state D of this example, 10 games are set as CZ, but it is needless to say that the setting of CZ is not limited to 10 games.

  In the processing after step S603, processing according to the state is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is ON (YES in step S603), the advantageous state A process is performed (step S604). If it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is OFF (NO in step S603), the process proceeds to step S605, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state B flag is ON (step S605). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is ON (YES in step S605), an advantageous state B process is performed (step S606). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is OFF (NO in step S605), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state C flag is ON (step S607). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is ON (YES in step S607), an advantageous state C process is performed (step S608). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is OFF (NO in step S607), the process proceeds to step S609, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state D flag is ON (step S609). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is ON (YES in step S609), an advantageous state D process is performed (step S610). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is OFF (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S611, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state E flag is ON (step S611). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (YES in step S611), an advantageous state E process is performed (step S612). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (NO in step S611), the process proceeds to step S613, and processing in the pull-back state is performed (step S613).

  If it is determined in step S601 that the game number management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S614, and processing in the hell state is performed.

  Hereinafter, the processes in the hell state, each process in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, and the pullback state process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61 are flowcharts showing an example of each process executed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. Specifically, FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the hell state. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the advantageous state A process. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the advantageous state B process. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the advantageous state C time process. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state D. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the advantageous state E. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pullback state process.

[10-3-4-1. Hell state processing]
In the hell state, first, it is determined whether or not a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) is selected by internal lottery (step S6011). If it is determined in step S601 that one of the special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in the internal lottery (YES in step S6011), the selected special role is selected. The transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) is performed according to the type. This transfer destination determination lottery is a lottery for determining the advantageous state of the transfer destination, and the transfer destination is determined from the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E.

  In the transfer destination determination lottery of step S6012, the favorable state A is determined with a probability of 59600/65536, the favorable state B is determined with a probability of 3935/65536, and the advantageous state C is determined with a probability of 2000/65536. The advantage state D is determined with a probability of 1/65536, and the advantage state E is determined with a probability of 1/65536. Note that the slot machine 1 of this example is configured so that hall-related persons or the like can be changed to any setting among the settings 1 to 6, and each winning combination is selected in the internal lottery for each of these settings. Probability is different. However, the probability of selecting a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) in the internal lottery is set to the same probability in any of the settings 1 to 6. Here, the probability that a special watermelon role is selected, the probability that a special cherry role is selected, and the probability that a special maintenance replay role is selected may be set in common in settings 1 to 6, or each special role may be selected. Although the probabilities to be issued differ for each setting, the combined probabilities for selecting the special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) may be common to the settings 1 to 6.

  When the transition destination is determined in step S6012, the transition destination is determined in steps S6013 to S6016, and the gaming state flag corresponding to the transition destination is set to ON.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the transition destination is the advantageous state A (YES in all of steps S6013 to S6016), the advantageous state A flag is set to ON (step S6017). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6018, and the ceiling game number is set to 32 games (TA ← 32). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6019, where the precursor flag is set to ON.

  If it is determined that the transition destination is the advantageous state B (YES in steps S6013 to 6015 and NO in step S6016), the advantageous state B flag is set to ON (step S6022). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6023, where the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TB ← 32). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6019, where the precursor flag is set to ON.

  If it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state C (YES in steps S6013 and 6014 and NO in step S6015), the advantageous state C flag is set ON (step S6024). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6025, and the ceiling game number is set to 32 games (TC ← 32). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6019, where the precursor flag is set to ON.

  If the precursor flag is set to ON in step S6019, then the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), and the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state process ends. To do.

  In addition, when the number of ceiling games is set, a prelude effect is performed until the game of the number of ceiling games is digested. However, if the winning combination (BB1, BB2) is selected in the initial lottery or the internal lottery is selected during the sign production (until the game with the number of ceiling games is consumed) Even if all the games of the number of ceiling games are not digested, the ART game and the bonus game are executed.

  If it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state D (YES in step S6013 and NO in step S6014), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6026). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6027, and the number of CZ games is set to 10 games (CZ ← 10). At this time, the ceiling game number is not set (the ceiling game number may be set to 0 game). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the number-of-games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state process ends.

  If it is determined that the destination is the advantageous state E (NO in step S6013), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6028). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6029, and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (ART ← 50). When the ART game number ART is set to 50 games (YES in step S6129), the ART flag is set to ON (step S6030). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), and the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), the hell state process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

  If a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is not selected in the internal lottery (NO in step S6011), the processing in steps S6012 to S6021 is skipped, and the game The number management state is not started (it does not shift to the advantageous state), and the hell state continues.

  By the way, if the destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed in the hell state, the lottery result is shifted to an advantageous state regardless of the result, and the instruction function always operates once. The determination as to whether or not the winning combination has been won (step S6011) or / and the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) correspond to the ART first lottery in the hell state.

  Also, in the hell state, it is determined that a special combination has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011), and when the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, the game number management flag is set to ON, The count of the game number counter GC is started from the next game. Even if it is in hell and the bonus game is being executed, if it is determined that a special role has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the transition destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, The game number management flag is set to ON and counting of the game number counter GC is started from the next game. Therefore, in this case, if the transition destination is any of the advantageous states A to C, the ceiling game is consumed during the bonus game, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state D, the chance zone ( CA) will be executed, and if the transition destination is in the advantageous state E, the bonus game is terminated and the ART game is started when the RT state is transitioned to RT2 (controlled to RT0 after the bonus game is terminated) Will be. When the game number management process is started (when the game state related to the display of the instruction function is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state), the bonus role is excluded during the game number management process. The instruction function is always activated once during the game number management process (except when the game is selected by internal lottery).

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is compared with the period in which it is set to OFF, the period in which the game is set to ON is longer. The period in which the number management flag is set to ON is configured to be 70% or less of the entire game period. For this reason, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing euphoria.

[10-3-4-2. Processing in advantageous state A]
In the advantageous state A, first, in step S6031, digestion processing of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, every time the game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TA ← TA-1).

  If 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6031, then it is determined whether or not a game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (step S6032). ). The predetermined threshold G is a value set so that the number of medals as game media to be paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed a prescribed value. In this example, when the specified value is N, a value obtained by dividing N by the inclination value (net increase per game) is set as the predetermined threshold G. For example, when it is specified that the number of game media to be paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, when the slope value is 2 [sheets / game], 1500 games are set as the predetermined threshold G. Is set. However, in a slot machine on which a bonus game is mounted, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest from the above G may be set as a predetermined threshold value. For example, when it is specified that the number of game media to be paid out to a player in one game number management process does not exceed 3000, the slope value is 2 [games / game], and the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest is 34 games. When this is done, 1466 games are set as a predetermined threshold.

  If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6034, and the ART first lottery is performed (step S6034). The initial ART lottery performed in step S6034 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and the winning probability is set to 1/65536.

  If the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6036, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TA ← 0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6037), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6038), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6039), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. In step S6040, the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6041). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6042, and RT state transition processing is performed.

  The RT state transition process in step S6042 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated in step S6041, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The instruction function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by (reverse pressing). When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs a transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6043), the advantageous state A process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though the instruction function display is performed, the process goes from RT1 to RT2 in step S6042. No transition control is performed. When “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6043, but the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed. When the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6043. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when “uplift lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, control for shifting to RT2 is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the upside replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line. However, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up-playing replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, the ART flag is set to ON although it is maintained at RT1. Further, according to the lottery table of FIG. 49, “lifting lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” corresponds only to a condition device for one push order, but conditions corresponding to six push orders such as a push order bell. It is preferable to have a device.

  The ART flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an ART game is in progress. When it is ON, it means that it is during ART, and when it is OFF, it is not during ART. That is, it is in non-ART.

  If the ART first lottery in step S6034 is not won (NO in step S6035), the process advances to step S6044 to determine whether the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA = 0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the process does not proceed to step S6053 described later (that is, the processes in steps S6053 to S6061 are not performed), and the advantageous state A is continued without shifting to the hell state. The

  If the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6035), even if the number of games of the ceiling game is not digested, the advantageous state A is ended and the advantageous state E is shifted to, while the ART first win lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6035), the advantageous state A continues until the number of ceiling games is exhausted. However, although it is not shown in FIG. 56, even if the first lottery for ART is lost (NO in step S6035) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), a bonus combination in the internal lottery is performed. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first win lottery is performed with a probability of 328 of 65536, and when the ART first win lottery is won, immediately after the bonus game is over, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E. On the other hand, when the ART first win lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TA ← 32), and the advantageous state A time process is performed again.

  If it is determined in step S6044 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA = 0) (YES in step S6044), the process proceeds to step S6053, and the game number counter GC currently being processed, that is, the currently ongoing game number counter GC is set. After the count is started (after the game number management flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). Whether or not the instruction function display has been performed once is determined by the internal lottery after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or flashing)). One of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected, and the maximum payout number (8 in this example) among the winning payout numbers corresponding to “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected. This corresponds to a determination as to whether or not a stop operation mode for paying out a sheet has been instructed even once.

  If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has been performed once or more during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6054), and the precursor flag is OFF. (Step S6055), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6056), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6057), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6058). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6059, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6059), the advantageous state A time process ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

  If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has not yet been performed during the game number management process (NO in step S6053), the instruction count is set to one (step S6060). The function flag is set to ON (step S6061). Thereby, in the advantageous state A process, if it is determined that the instruction function display has not yet been performed even if the ceiling game number TA (32 games in this example) has already been consumed. The instruction function display is not performed until the instruction function display is performed at least once, and the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

  However, although not shown in FIG. 56, when the bonus game is executed after the count of the game number counter GC is started, the instruction function display is displayed after the count of the game number counter GC is started. Has not been performed once (even if NO is determined in step S6053), the processing in steps S6054 to S6059 is performed, and the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state. For example, the bonus game (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery without shifting to the advantageous state A from the hell state, and the bonus game is being executed in the internal lottery. In addition, when the ART first win lottery is not won and the ceiling game is set to 32 games after the bonus game ends and the advantageous state A process is performed again, the instruction function display is not performed and the ceiling game is 32. When the game is digested, the instruction function display is not performed once after the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A, but the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state.

  If it is determined in step S6032 that the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process exceeds a predetermined threshold G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6053, and during the game management process. Then, it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), after the processes in steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, the advantageous state A The time process ends and the process returns to the main routine.

  By the way, considering the combination probability (26280/65536) of selecting any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” in the internal lottery and a predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability Although it can occur only with an extremely low probability, the game number counter GC has a predetermined threshold value without displaying the instruction function once after the game number counter GC starts counting. There may also be a case where it is determined that the value exceeds G (NO in step S6032 and NO in step S6053). In this case, the processing from step S6054 to step S6059 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6060), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6061). Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state A is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the game number management process.

  Further, as described above, even after the set ceiling game number TA (32 games in this example) has been consumed, hell if the instruction function display is not performed once during the game number management process. Since the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the state, the number of remaining ceiling games TA may become negative as a result of performing the subtraction process in step S6031. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, which was the initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to “FF”, and the ceiling game number TA is “FF” As long as the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6031 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6044. Thereby, even if the advantageous state A is continued after the ceiling game number TA becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 can be prevented from being interrupted and the game being interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In step S6031, if the remaining ceiling game number TA is negative, the remaining ceiling game number TA is set to “FF” even if the game is executed, and “FF” It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting it. The remaining ceiling game number TA has been described as a subtraction method in which the remaining ceiling game number TA is subtracted each time the game is executed.

  In this example, when the ceiling game number TA, which was the initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TA is set to “FF”. , It may be a process of keeping 00 without setting to “FF”.

  In this example, the initial value of the ceiling game number TA is 32 games, and the subtraction method in which the ceiling game number TA is subtracted every time the game is executed has been described, but it goes without saying that an addition method may be used. .

[10-3-4-3. Processing in advantageous state B]
In the advantageous state B, first, in step S6071, the digest process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, every time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TB ← TB-1).

  If 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6071, then whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6072). If the game number counter GC is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6072), the process proceeds to step S6073 and an ART game number is added and a lottery is performed (step S6073). The advantageous state B is a state in which it is determined that when the game with the number of ceiling games TB is consumed, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E and at least 50 ART games are executed, so the ART performed in step S6073 The game number addition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of ART games, and the winning probability is set to 1/65536.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6074, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TB = 0). If the number of ceiling games is 0 (YES in step S6074), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6075), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6076), and the advantageous state E flag is set to ON. (Step S6077), the number of ART games is set (Step S6078), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6079). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6080, and RT state transition processing is performed.

  The RT state transition processing in step S6080 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated in step S6079, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The instruction function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by (reverse pressing). When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs a transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6081), the advantageous state B process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if “raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though the instruction function display is performed, the process goes from RT1 to RT2 in step S6080. No transition control is performed. When “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6081, but the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed. When the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6080, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6081. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when “uplift lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, control for shifting to RT2 is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the upside replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line. However, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up-playing replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, the ART flag is set to ON although it is maintained at RT1. In addition, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to six pushing orders, such as the pushing order bell, for “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip”.

  In step S6078, if the extra lottery in step S6073 is not won, the number of games for one shot of the ART game (50 games in this example) is set. The number of games (50 + α) obtained by adding the number of games α to be added is set.

  If it is determined in step S6074 that the number of ceiling games is not 0 (TB = 0) (NO in step S6074), whether or not the ART game extra lottery in step S6073 is won. Steps S6075 to S6081 are not performed. That is, the advantageous state B is continued without shifting to the hell state.

  If it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6082). That is, any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” in the internal lottery after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or flashing)). Is selected, and the stop operation mode for paying out the maximum payout number (8 in this example) of the payout payout numbers corresponding to “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is instructed even once. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  In the advantageous state B, when the game of the ceiling game number TB is consumed, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E and the ART game is executed, but it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. (NO in step S6072). For example, the ART game is executed by shifting from the hell state to the advantageous state E, the ART game is further added, and once the ART game is finished, the count of the game number counter GC is not shifted to the hell state. In the case where the game is shifted to the advantageous state B in a continued state (for example, when the first lottery of ART is won in the pull-back mode and the advantageous state B is transferred), the ceiling game TB is digested in the advantageous state B. In this case, the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). In such a case, if the instruction function display is performed even once, the advantageous state B is forcibly shifted to the hell state, but the instruction function display is 1 during the game number management process. In rare cases, it may not happen. In that case, even if it is in the advantageous state B, the instruction function is displayed once without being shifted to the advantageous state E (without the ART game being executed), and then forcibly, The advantageous state B is shifted to the hell state. Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state B is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), whether or not an instruction function display has been performed during the game number management process in step S6082 It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has not yet been performed during the game number management process (NO in step S6082), the instruction count is set to one (step S6089), and the instruction function flag is set. Is set to ON (step S6090). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has been performed during the game number management process (YES in step S6082), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6083), and the precursor flag is set to OFF. (Step S6084), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (Step S6085), the hell state flag is set to ON (Step S6086), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (Step S6087). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6088, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6088), the advantageous state B process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. As a result, when the game number counter GC starts counting from the hell state to any one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, even if the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold, The instruction function display is not performed once and the advantageous state B is not shifted to the hell state. The instruction function display is always performed once and then the hell state is transferred.

  If it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), the set ceiling game number TB (32 games in this example) is consumed. Even if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, the advantageous state B continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of performing the subtraction process in step S6071, The remaining ceiling game number TB may be negative. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TB, which was the initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TB is set to FF, and when the ceiling game number TB is FF, As long as the advantageous state B continues without shifting to another advantageous state, the process of step S6071 is not performed. Thereby, even if the advantageous state B is continued after the ceiling game number TB becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 can be prevented from being interrupted and the game being interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In step S6071, if the remaining ceiling game number TB is negative, the remaining ceiling game number TB is set to “FF” even if the game is executed, and “FF” It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting it. The remaining ceiling game number TB has been described as a subtraction method in which the remaining number of games is subtracted each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-4. Processing in advantageous state C]
In the advantageous state C, first, in step S6091, the digest process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, every time the game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TC ← TC-1).

  If 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6091, then, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6092). When the game number counter GC is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6092), the process proceeds to step S6094, and the ART first lottery is performed (step S6094). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6094 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and the winning probability is set to 1/65536.

  If the ART first lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the process proceeds to step S6096, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TC ← 0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6097), the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6098), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6099), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. In step S6100, the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6101). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6102, and RT state transition processing is performed.

  The RT state transition processing in step S6102 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated in step S6101, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The instruction function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by (reverse pressing). When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs a transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6103), the advantageous state C process ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though the instruction function display is performed, the process goes from RT1 to RT2 in step S6102. However, the ART flag is set ON in step S6103. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when “uplift lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, control for shifting to RT2 is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the upside replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line. However, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up-playing replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, the ART flag is set to ON although it is maintained at RT1.

  If the ART first lottery in step S6094 is not won (NO in step S6095), the process advances to step S6104 to determine whether the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC = 0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the processes in steps S6106 to 6109 described later are not performed. That is, the advantageous state C is continued.

  When the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6095), even if the number of games of the ceiling game is not digested, the advantageous state C is ended and the advantage state E is shifted to, while the ART first win lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6095), the advantageous state C will continue until the game with the number of ceiling games is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 58, even if the first lottery is lost (NO in step S6095) and the number of ceiling games is not zero (NO in step S6104), a bonus combination will be made in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first win lottery is performed with a probability of 328 of 65536, and when the ART first win lottery is won, immediately after the bonus game is over, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E. On the other hand, when the ART first win lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TC ← 32), and the advantageous state C process is performed again.

  If it is determined in step S6104 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC = 0) (YES in step S6104), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6106), and the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF ( In step S6107, the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6108). In step S6109, 10 games are set as the number of games in the chance zone (CZ ← 10), the advantageous state C time process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

  If it is determined in step S6092 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6112, and the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S6112). If it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times (YES in step S6112), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6113), and the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6114). The advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6115), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6116), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6117). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6118, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6118), the advantageous state C time process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

  By the way, also in the advantageous state C, as in the advantageous state A, the composite probability (26280/65536) that any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. ) And a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games) can be generated only with a very low probability, but the instruction function display is 1 after the game counter GC starts counting. There may be a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold G without being repeated (when NO is determined in step S6092 and NO is determined in step S6112). In this case, the processing from step S6113 to step S6118 is not performed, the number of times of instruction is set to 1 (step S6119), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6120). Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state C is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

  Further, even when the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value and the set ceiling game number TC (32 games in this example) has been consumed, an instruction is given during the game number management process. If the function display has not been performed once, the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of performing the subtraction process in step S6091, the remaining ceiling game number TA may become negative. Can occur. Therefore, when the ceiling game number TA, which was the initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ceiling game number TC is set to “FF”, and the ceiling game number TC is “FF” As long as the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state or another advantageous state, the process of step S6091 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6104. Thereby, even if the advantageous state C is continued after the ceiling game number TC becomes 0 by the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from causing an error and interrupting the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Even in step S6091, if the remaining ceiling game number TC is negative, even if the game is executed, the remaining ceiling game number TC is set to “FF”, and “FF” It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting it. The remaining ceiling game number TC is described as a subtraction method that is subtracted every time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method that is added every time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-5. Advantageous state D processing]
In the advantageous state D, first, in step S6131, the CZ game is digested. Specifically, every time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of CZ games set as 10 games (CZ ← CZ-1).

  If 1 is subtracted from the number of CZ games in step S6131, then whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6132).

  If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6132), the process proceeds to step S6134, and the ART first lottery is performed (step S6134). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6134 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and compared with any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state C in which the winning probability is set to 1/65536. Is also set to a high probability. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, when a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role) is selected in the internal lottery, it is won with a probability of 65536/65536 (100%) When one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the lottery, the first lottery of the ART in step S6134 is won so that it is won with a probability of 16384/65536 (25%). Is done. If a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery during the advantageous state D and a bonus game is executed, the bonus is not limited unless the game number counter GC exceeds the threshold G. After the game is executed, it is determined that the state is shifted to the advantageous state E and the ART game is executed.

  If the ART first lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6136, and the number of CZ games is set to 0 (CZ ← 0). Thereafter, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6137), the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF (step S6138), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6139), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6140), the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6141). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6142, and RT state transition processing is performed.

  The RT state transition processing in step S6142 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated in step S6141, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-middle-left”. The instruction function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by (reverse pressing). When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs a transition control from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6143), the advantageous state D process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if “raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though the instruction function display is performed, the process goes from RT1 to RT2 in step S6142. No transition control is performed. When “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6143, but the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed. When the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S61042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6143. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when “uplift lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery at RT1, control for shifting to RT2 is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the upside replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line. However, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up-playing replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, the ART flag is set to ON although it is maintained at RT1. In addition, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to six pushing orders, such as the pushing order bell, for “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip”.

  If the ART initial winning lottery is not won in step S6134 (NO in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6144, and it is determined whether the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ = 0). If the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), the processes in steps S6153 to 6160 described later are not performed. That is, the advantageous state D is continued without shifting to the hell state.

  If the ART first win lottery is won (YES in step S6135), even if the number of CZ games is not digested, the advantageous state D is ended and the advantageous state E is shifted to, while the ART first win lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6135), the advantageous state D continues until the number of CZ games has been consumed. However, although not shown in FIG. 59, even if the lottery is lost in the first ART lottery (NO in step S6135) and the number of CZ games is not zero (NO in step S6144), a bonus combination in the internal lottery is performed. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. During the execution of this bonus game, an extra lottery in which the number of ART games is added with a probability of 328 of 65536 is performed, and when the extra lottery is won, immediately after the bonus game is over, the game is shifted to the advantageous state E. The ART game is executed including the added number of games. On the other hand, when the bonus game is not executed and the winning lottery is not won, 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART ← 50). A game ART game is executed.

  If it is determined in step S6144 that the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ = 0) (YES in step S6144), the process proceeds to step S6153, and whether or not the instruction function display has been performed once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not (step S6153).

  If it is determined in step S6153 that the instruction function display has been performed once or more during the game number management process (YES in step S6153), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6154), and the advantageous state D flag is set. Is set to OFF (step S6155), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6156), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6157). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6158, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6158), the advantageous state D process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

  By the way, also in the advantageous state D, as in the advantageous state A and the advantageous state C, the composite probability (one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected by internal lottery ( In consideration of 26280/65536) and a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), it can be generated only with a very low probability, but in terms of probability, it is indicated after the count of the game number counter GC is started. There may be a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold G without being displayed once (when NO is determined at step S6132 and NO is determined at step S6153). obtain. In this case, the processing from step S6154 to step S6158 is not performed, the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6159), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6160). Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state D is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the game number management process.

  Further, as described above, even after the set CZ game number CZ (10 games in this example) has been consumed, hell if the instruction function display is not performed once during the game number management process. Since the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the state, the number of remaining CZ games CZ may become negative as a result of performing the subtraction process in step S6131. Therefore, when the CZ game number CZ, which was 10 games at the initial value, becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the remaining chance game number CZ is set to “FF”, and the chance game number CZ is “FF”. Sometimes, as long as the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6131 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6144. Thereby, even if the chance game (CZ) is continued after the chance game number CZ becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 is prevented from being interrupted and the game being interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

If the remaining chance game number CZ becomes negative in step S6131, the remaining chance game number CZ is set to “FF” even if the game is executed, and “FF” is originally set. It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting. The remaining chance game number CZ is described as a subtraction method that is subtracted every time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that it may be an addition method that is added every time the game is executed.
[10-3-4-6. Processing in advantageous state E]
The advantageous state E is a process during the ART game. In this advantageous state E, first, in step S6171, the ART game is digested. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ART games preset in step S6040, step S6067, step S6100, step S6140, or step S6197 (ART ← ART-1).

  If 1 is subtracted from the number of ART games in step S6171, then whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6172).

  If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6173, and it is determined whether or not the game zone is in the specialized zone (step). S6173).

  If it is determined in step S6173 that it is not in the special zone (YES in step S6173), the special zone lottery described above is performed using the special zone lottery table in FIG. 69 (step S6174). When the special zone lottery in step S6174 is won (YES in step S6175), the process proceeds to step S6176, and RT state transition processing is performed (step S6176).

  The RT state transition processing in step S6176 is processing for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when “raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, since the instruction function is activated, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of “right-left-middle” (reverse pinching). The instruction function is displayed so that the operation is stopped by pressing. When the player performs a stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the up-replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 performs transition control from RT2 to RT3. When the special zone lottery is won, the ART lottery state is shifted from the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state to the specialized zone preparation state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, the special zone preparation state is shifted to the special zone state.

  In step S6177, an extra determination lottery is performed. In the addition determination lottery in step S6177, first, it is determined whether or not the number of ART games is to be added, and if it is determined to be added (YES in step S6178), the process proceeds to the addition game number determination lottery in step S6179. Whether to add a game will be drawn. In step S6180, an additional game number N determined in the additional game number determination lottery is added (ART ← ART + N). As described above, the extra determination lottery is performed using FIG. 62, and the additional game number determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 63 to 66. FIG. 62 is an example of a lottery table used for the extra determination lottery, FIG. 63 is an example of a lottery table used for the extra game number determination lottery when the ART is in a low probability state, and FIG. 64 is an ART medium high probability state. FIG. 65 is an example of a lottery table used for the extra game number determination lottery in the special zone, and FIG. 66 is an example of a lottery table used for the extra game number determination lottery in the special zone. It is an example of a lottery table used for a game number determination lottery.

  If it is determined in step S6173 that the zone is in the specialized zone (NO in step S6173), step S6174, step S6175, and step S6176 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S6177. When it is determined in step S6175 that the special zone lottery in step S6174 has been lost (NO in step S6175), step S6176 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177.

  In step S6181, the lottery state transition lottery during ART is performed using the lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. As described above, the lottery transition to the lottery state during ART is a lottery that determines whether the lottery state during ART during the basic ART is controlled between the low probability state during ART or the high probability state during ART. Then, based on the result of the lottery state transition during ART in step S6181, the lottery state transition process during ART in step S6183 is performed.

  More specifically, in the ART medium low probability state, refer to “Low → High” in FIG. 68, and the lottery to shift to the ART medium high probability state with the probability corresponding to the condition device that has been operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. (Step S6181), and when this transition lottery is won (YES in step S6182), the transition control to the ART medium high probability state is performed (step S6183). If it is lost in the transition lottery in step S6181 (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is terminated, and the ART medium low probability state is maintained. In the ART medium / high probability state, referring to “High → Low” in FIG. 68, the lottery for shifting to the ART medium / low probability state is performed with the probability corresponding to the condition device operated in accordance with the result of the internal lottery. If (step S6181) wins this transition lottery (YES in step S6182), the transition control to the ART low probability state is performed (step S6183). If it is lost in the transition lottery in step S6181 (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is terminated, and the ART medium high probability state is maintained. The lottery state transition lottery during ART in step S6181 is performed using the lottery state transition lottery table during ART shown in FIG. FIG. 68 is a lottery table used for the lottery transition to the lottery state during ART. In addition, “low” shown in FIG. 68 means “ART medium low probability state”, and “high” shown in FIG. 68 also means “ART medium high probability state”. The lottery transition to the lottery state during ART is executed every time the internal lottery is performed (every time the game is executed) in both the high probability state during ART and the low probability state during ART.

  If it is determined that the winning determination lottery in step S6177 is lost (NO in step S6178), the process proceeds to step S6184, and the determination of the ART game is performed. In the ART game digestion determination performed in step S6184, it is determined whether or not all of the ART games to be executed have been digested, and if it is determined that all of the ART games to be executed have been digested (YES in step S6184). The advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6185), the pullback state flag is set to ON (step S6186), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6187), and the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6185). S6188), the advantageous state E process ends and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6184 that the ART game to be executed is undigested (NO in step S6184), the process proceeds to step S6181, and the ART game is continued.

  Although not shown in FIG. 60, there is a step of determining the RT state when the final game of the ART game is finished (when it is determined YES in step S6184). If the RT state determined here is RT1, the pullback state A flag is set to ON in step S6186, and if it is RT2, the pullback state B flag is set to ON. The pullback states A and B will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S6172 that the game number counter GC has exceeded a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example), that is, the number of games executed by the player in the game number management process has a predetermined threshold value. If it is determined that it has been exceeded (NO in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6190, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process (step S6190). If it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed during the game management process (YES in step S6190), it is determined whether the ART flag is ON (step S6191).

  If it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is ON (YES in step S6191), the ART flag is set OFF (step S6192), and the advantageous state E flag is set OFF (step S6193). The function flag is set to OFF (step S6194), the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6195), and the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6196). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6197, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (GC ← 0), the advantageous state E process is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine. That is, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold (when NO is determined in step S6172), even if the ART game is halfway (the ART game If the end condition is not satisfied (even if the specified number of games (50 games in this example) is not digested), the ART game being executed is forcibly ended in the middle. If it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S6191), step S6192 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6193.

  By the way, in the advantageous state E, as in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, and the advantageous state D, any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is selected in the internal lottery. The game number counter GC starts probabilistically, although it can occur only with a very low probability in consideration of the combined probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games). If it is determined that the game number counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold G without any indication function display being made (NO in step S6172 and NO in step S6190). If). In this case, the processing from step S6191 to step S6197 is not performed, the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6198), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6199). Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state E is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

  In addition, as described above, even after the number of ART games to be executed ART (50 games + α in this example) has been exhausted, the instruction function is displayed once during the game number management process. Otherwise, the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of performing the subtraction process in step S6171, the remaining ART game number ART may be negative. Therefore, when the ART game number ART, whose initial value is (50 games + α), becomes 0 by the execution of the game, the ART game number TA is set to “FF”, and the ART game number TA is set to “FF”. If it is, as long as the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state or the pullback state, the process of step S6171 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6184. Thereby, even if the advantageous state E is continued after the ART game number ART becomes 0 by the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from causing an error and interrupting the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In step S6171, if the remaining ART game number ART becomes negative, the remaining ART game number ART is set to “FF” even if the game is executed, and “FF” in the first place. It may be a process of keeping “00” without setting. Further, the remaining ART game number ART has been described as a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-7. Processing in pullback state]
The pull-back state is controlled after the advantageous state E ends when the number of ART games to be executed has been exhausted and the game number counter GC has not exceeded the predetermined threshold value G (when it is determined YES in step S6184). In this example, a pullback state A and a pullback state B are prepared. The winning probability of the initial ART lottery is set higher than the advantageous states A to C and the advantageous state E and lower than the advantageous state D in both of the pullback states A and B. It may be set higher than state D.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game, the RT state is not shifted from RT2 to RT1 in principle, but the “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” in the internal lottery. Even if one of them is selected and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, the reel stop button 211 is not operated according to this instruction function display, so that the When the zero point is displayed on the effective line, the process shifts from RT2 to RT1 under the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. In this example, as described above, if the RT state when the final game of the ART game is finished (when YES is determined in step S6184), if the RT state is RT1, it is controlled to the withdrawal state A, and the final game of the ART game is finished. If the RT state at that time is RT2, the pull-back state B is controlled. Since the withdrawal state is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is completed, even if the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is started is RT2, the final state of the ART game When the zero bell zero is displayed on the active line in the game, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1, so that the pullback state A is controlled.

  Hereinafter, the process in the pull-back state will be described. In the withdrawal state, first, every time the game is executed, an ART first lottery is performed according to the withdrawal state (step S6191). The winning probability in the ART initial winning lottery is as shown in the ART initial winning lottery table in the retracted state of FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 70, when the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B are compared, the pull-back state B is more advantageous than the pull-back state A in that it is easier for a player to win the lottery for the first ART.

  If the ART first lottery in step S6191 is won (YES in step S6192), is the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example)? It is determined whether or not (step S6195).

  If it is determined that the game number counter GC is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold G (YES in step S6195), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6196), and the ART game number is set to 50 games (step S6196). In step S6197), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6198). Then, it progresses to step S6199 and RT state transfer processing is performed.

  The RT state transition process in step S6199 is a process for shifting the RT state, but this process is a process that is performed in the pullback state A and is not performed in the pullback state B. This is because the RT state transition process in step S6199 is a process for shifting the RT state from RT1 to RT2 as a preparation process for executing the ART game, and thus is not performed in the pull-back state B where the RT state is RT2. This is because the state is shifted to RT2 in the pull-back state A where the state is RT1. Thereafter, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6200).

  If the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold G in step S6195 (if NO is determined in step S6195), the process proceeds to step S6201, and the instruction function is displayed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S6201). If it is determined that the instruction function display is performed during the game management process (YES in step S6201), the pullback state flag is set to OFF (step S6202). Specifically, if the current pullback state is the pullback state A, the pullback state A flag is set to OFF, and if the current pullback state is the pullback state B, the pullback state B flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, if the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6203), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6204), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6205). If it is determined in step S6203 that the instruction function flag is OFF (NO in step S6203), the process skips step S6204 and proceeds to step S6205 to set the game number management flag to OFF. (Step S6205). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6206), and the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6207), the process in the pullback state is terminated, and the process returns to the main routine.

  By the way, even in the retracted state, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, the advantageous state D, and the advantageous state E, any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” in the internal lottery. Can be generated only with a very low probability, considering the synthesis probability (26280/65536) and a predetermined threshold G (1500 games), but the probability of the game counter GC When it is determined that the game number counter GC has exceeded the predetermined threshold G without displaying the instruction function once after the count is started (NO in step S6195 and NO in step S6201). (If it is determined). In this case, the processing from step S6202 to step S6207 is not performed, the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6208), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6209). Thereby, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not immediately displayed and the instruction function is not shifted to the hell state. The withdrawal state is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed once during the game number management process.

  When the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example) (NO in step S6195), it is determined that the instruction function flag is OFF in step S6203 (step S6203). (NO in S6203). However, in rare cases, as described above, NO may be determined in step S6201, and the instruction function flag may be set to ON in step S6209. In this case, it is determined in step S6203 that the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6203).

  If the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold G in step S6195 (if NO is determined in step S6195), the game is shifted to the hell state regardless of the result of the initial ART lottery. . More specifically, when the game number counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value G in step S6195, even if the ART first win lottery in step S6192 is won, the ART game is not executed and the player is pulled back. Is finished and the state is shifted to the hell state, and the count of the game number counter is finished (game number management process is finished).

  When it is determined that the ART initial winning lottery in step S6191 has not been won (NO in step S6192), a pull-up maintenance lottery is performed (step S6193). In the maintenance lottery, the maintenance lottery is performed so as to win with a probability of 49/50 in the pull-back state A (that is, the lottery is lost with a probability of 1/50). A maintenance lottery is performed so that the player wins with a probability of 19/20 (that is, the player wins with a probability of 1/20). Therefore, when the pull-back state A is compared with the pull-back state B, the pull-back state B is easier to win the ART first win lottery, but the pull-back state B is less likely to be maintained than the pull-back state A. On the other hand, if it is lost in the maintenance lottery of step S6193 (if NO is determined in step S6194), the process proceeds to step S6201, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6201). If it is determined that the instruction function display is performed during the game management process (YES in step S6201), the above-described processes in steps S6202 to S6207 are performed (that is, it is determined that the state is shifted to the hell state). ), The process in the pull-back state is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the instruction function display is not performed during the game management process (NO in step S6201), the processes in steps S6202 to S6207 are not performed, and the number of instructions is set to one ( In step S6208), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6209).

  By the way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the special zone preparation), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, RT2 or RT3 to RT1. However, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display, the process may shift from RT2 or RT3 to RT1. That is, it is a game property in which the player is given the right to select whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is controlled to the pullback state A or the pullback state B. I can say that. Therefore, the state after the end of the advantageous state E is a pull-back state A in which it is difficult to win the lottery for the first ART but the pull-back state is easily maintained, and a pull-back that is easy to win in the lottery for the first ART but is difficult to maintain the pull-back state. It is possible for the player himself to select in which state the game is to be played out of the state B. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in an ART game that tends to be monotonous simply by digesting the game. Also, even if the reel stop button 211 is operated without displaying the instruction function and the RT2 or RT3 is shifted to RT1, the pullback state A is controlled to be easily maintained after the ART game is over. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In particular, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with the instruction function display during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the special zone preparation), the game is selected in the pull back state B. The player selects a high-risk high-return game as compared with the pull-back state A, in which the player can easily shift to the hell state but is easy to win the first lottery for the ART. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is a relatively low risk low return state or a relatively high risk high return game. Can be selected as desired.

  However, if the player attempts to select the relatively high-risk / high-return pull-back state B, the player moves from RT2 or RT3 having a relatively high replay synthesis probability to RT1 having a relatively low replay synthesis probability. It is necessary to take the risk that If there is a large number of remaining ART games, there is a possibility that any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” will be selected in the internal lottery until the ART game ends. Although it is high, the number of medals as a prize to be paid out to the player during the ART game is reduced accordingly (in some cases, the number of medals consumed in running the game is more than the number of medals paid out as a prize. Risk). On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the ART game is small, the number of medals as a prize to be paid out to the player during the ART game can be increased, but the internal lottery will be completed until the ART game is over. There is a risk that any one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” cannot be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the withdrawal state is determined according to the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is completed, so that the transition to RT1 is made in the last game of the ART game. Is preferred. However, one of “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is not necessarily selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, it is preferable for a player who wants to select the pull-back state B to stick to not moving to RT1 until the last game of the ART game is approaching, but it is also possible to shift to RT1 at an early time, You can have fun at which point you want to move to RT1.

  In addition, although some players do not desire the relatively high-risk / high-return pull-back state B by themselves, the player displays the instruction function displayed during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the special zone preparation). In some cases, the reel stop button 211 may be accidentally operated, but it can give a tension to the game during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the special zone preparation). In addition, even if the player does not desire the withdrawal state B, the game is played under a situation in which the ART initial lottery probability is relatively high, so that the player is not given a sense of loss.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of added games when the transition from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 occurs during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the special zone preparation). Even if the digestion is continued without stopping the progress of the ART game or the like while performing the determination lottery, the draw probability B is controlled to a relatively high pull-back state B, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, in step S602, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. In the slot machine 1 of this example, the predetermined threshold value is set to 1500 games, and when this threshold value is exceeded, the game number management flag is forcibly set to OFF. No more than 1500. However, since the game number management process continues until the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process, the game number counter GC may exceed 1500 games although the probability is extremely low. obtain. In particular, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the processing of the game number counter GC is performed with 8 bits, so that it can only count up to 65536 games. However, it cannot be said that the game number counter GC does not exceed 65536 games in terms of probability. Therefore, in this example, when the game number counter GC reaches the threshold value of 15000 games in step S602, the game number counter GC is set to FF. When the game number counter GC is FF, NO is determined in Step S6032, Step S6072, Step S6092, and Step S6031 and Step S6172. As a result, even when the instruction function display is not executed during the game number management process, it is possible to prevent the process of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 from causing an error and the game from being interrupted, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. It becomes possible to do.

[10-3-8. Production process at the time of winning]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that an effect operation lottery is performed based on the result of the internal lottery, and an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation is executed based on the result of the effect operation lottery. . Specifically, the internal lottery result information is transmitted from the main board 409 to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), and the sub-board 510 that has received this command performs an effect operation lottery based on the internal lottery result information. Control is performed so that the effect mode determined by the effect operation lottery is displayed on the image display body 500 and the like, and an audio effect is also performed.

  71 is an effect operation lottery table when winning an internal lottery at RT1, FIG. 72 is an effect operation lottery table when winning an internal lottery at RT2, and FIG. 73 is an effect operation lottery table when winning an internal lottery at RT3. It is. As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, in the internal lottery, BB1, “BB1 + watermelon”, “BB1 + cherry”, BB2, “BB2 + watermelon”, “BB2 + cherry”, watermelon, cherry, “push order bell 1” ~ "Pushing order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raising lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 aligned lip + normal maintenance lip" And, when one of a plurality of roles such as “7-matched fake lip + normal maintenance lip” is won, an effect can be executed. Of these multiple roles, except for the maintenance replay and the “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip”, regardless of whether the RT state is RT1 to RT3, The production operation probability is the same. On the other hand, with regard to the maintenance replay and “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip”, depending on whether the RT state is RT1 to RT3, the effect operation probability when winning in the internal lottery is different.

  In the winning combination column of FIGS. 71 to 73, only the combinations that can be won in each state of RT1 to RT3 (see FIG. 49) are described. The tables used for the effect operation lottery are not necessarily limited to those in which effect tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. For example, data having the same rendering operation probability may be prepared as a common table, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data having different rendering operation probabilities. FIG. 74 is another example of the effect operation lottery table. Referring to FIG. 74, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIG. 49, “Maintenance Replay”, “Up Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip”, “Up Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip”, “Lower Lip” The winning combination except “+ normal maintenance lip”, “seven regular lip + normal regular lip” and “7 regular fake lip + normal regular lip” are prepared as a common production operation lottery table as shown in FIG. 49, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIG. 49, “Maintenance Replay”, “Up Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip”, “Up Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip”, “Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip”, “ As for “7-matched lip + normally maintained lip” and “7-matched liplip + normally-maintained lip”, as shown in FIGS. Te It is also possible to prepare the table. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, when there are production tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3, lottery tables for “number of RT states × number of winning combinations (condition devices)” are prepared. As a result, the data capacity becomes enormous, and a long verification period is required, leading to the extension of the development period, whereas the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability When there is a plurality of RT states (RT1 to RT3) with different numbers, the effect when winning the winning combination (raising lip 1, raising lip 2, lowering lip) that may shift between these plural RT states Although the operation probability changes, the production operation probability when the winning combination (rare small role such as cherry or watermelon) that is not the winning combination that transitions between multiple RT states is won will not change The effect is that the data capacity can be reduced, that is, for the winning combination (replay role) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, if the stage operating probability does not change depending on the winning probability, replay will occur frequently even if the stage is activated. Although there is a production abnormality state that cannot be expected, the winning probability (bonus role (BB1, BB2) or small role (bell, watermelon, cherry)) that does not change the winning probability depending on the RT state needs to prepare a lottery table In particular, the data capacity can be reduced, especially when the main 409 needs to be controlled, since the capacity is limited.

  Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, when the maintenance replay or “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is won in the internal lottery, the performance is performed with a probability of approximately one half. Since the normal gaming state before the start of the ART game (the gaming state before winning the ART first lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the lifted lip 1 is displayed on the active line) is also RT1, in such a gaming state The production will be performed with a probability of approximately one half. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the performance is performed only with a very low probability compared to RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 is referred to as a low lip state with a relatively low replay synthesis probability, and RT2 and RT3 are referred to as a high lip state with a relatively high replay synthesis probability.

  When the low lip state and the high lip state are compared, although the high lip state has a higher replay synthesis probability, the high lip state is more difficult to produce than the low lip state. When the performance is performed, the player expects that a bonus (BB1, BB2) or a rare small role (watermelon, cherry) that can be expected to win the ART is won. However, if the performance is frequently performed in the high lip state, not only the player may not have such expectation when the performance is performed, but also the performance itself becomes troublesome. There is a fear. Therefore, in this example, in the high lip state, it is more difficult to produce an effect than in the low lip state, so that it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation when the effect is performed. Note that such game characteristics give the player the right to select whether the RT state after the ART game ends is controlled to a high lip state or a low lip state. It can be said that it is a game characteristic. Therefore, RT1 after the end of the ART game is difficult to win for a specific role (replay in this example) but has a high performance activation probability, and it is easy to win for a specific role (replay in this example), but the probability of performance operation It is possible for the player himself to select in which state the game is to be played among RT2 and RT3 having a low value. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in an ART game that tends to be monotonous simply by digesting the game. In addition, although it is preferable for a player who wants to select the RT1 after the ART game is finished to select RT1 that can be rendered with high frequency, it is preferable not to make a transition to RT1 until the last game of the ART game is approaching. Since it is possible to shift to RT1 at an early time, it is possible to enjoy at which point to shift to RT1. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT game is shifted from RT 2 or RT 3 to RT 1 during the ART game, the progress of the ART game or the like is not stopped while performing the extra game number determination lottery. Even if the digestion is continued, a highly anticipated performance is performed with high frequency in the RT state after the end of the ART game, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  62 to 74, as shown in FIG. 49, special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) and normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, normal maintenance) Replay role is not shown separately. This is only when the special role is selected in the internal lottery when it is in hell, and the internal lottery when the game number management flag is set to ON. This is because even if a special role is selected in, the function as a special role is not exhibited. That is, when the lottery is performed using any of the tables in FIGS. 62 to 74 when the game number management flag is set to ON, the lottery is performed without distinguishing between the special combination and the normal combination. Will be. For example, referring to the table of FIG. 67 used in the ART initial lottery performed when the game number management process is not being performed and the ART game is not being performed, a special watermelon as a single role in the internal lottery and a normal role will be described. Regardless of which watermelon (see FIG. 49) is selected, the ART initial winning lottery is performed with reference to the watermelon as a single role shown in the table of FIG.

  As described above, the process of each step shown in FIG. 54 is performed, so that the process related to the generation of the instruction function by the main board 409 (step S61 in FIG. 53) is performed. The process after step S62 of the process related to the generation of the indicated instruction function is performed.

[10-3-6. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process (specifically, for example, at the time of winning the push order small role in the ART game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects a display form of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display forms prepared in advance (for example, display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

  First, an example of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side. The instruction function is displayed by displaying.

  75 and 76 are diagrams for explaining the instruction function display. 75 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 76 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the “segment display” column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the “content” column shows the content that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Further, in FIG. 76, the “navi display” field shows an outline of the display of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and The scene and situation in which the display is used is shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function is displayed using two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating an indication of the pressing position, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least before the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 being rotated The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 for which the reel stop operation corresponding to has been performed. That is, the instruction function display period and the payout number display period do not overlap. If no game value (medal) is paid out as a result of the game, that is, if the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the instruction function display is performed and the payout number display is not performed, the instruction function display is canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the payout number display is performed. The instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) In a game in which the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612, when any reel among the rotating reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function display ( When the special display LED 612b) is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped (that is, when a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or when the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the instruction function is displayed. Even when the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the special display LED 612a as an indication of the pressing position (that is, when the reel is stopped at a position different from the instruction content), all The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is completed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that an instruction function is to be generated, what kind of instruction content is displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display is determined by the main board 409 in the game. To be determined based on the winning role. First, instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content within the range that does not deny the “appropriate pressing place” based on the winning combination of the game with respect to the instruction contents of the “approximate pressing place” displayed on the special display LED 612a. be able to. Specifically, for example, when “BB1 (red 7 symbol set)” is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 displays “2” on the special display LED 612a.
You may decide the instruction content to display (Red 7 Symbol), but in addition to that, it does not deny the game method aimed at “Red 7 Symbol”, so “0” (not specified) is displayed. The instruction content may be determined.

  In addition, the main board 409 has the “appropriate push order” based on the winning combination of the game, with respect to the “push order” instruction content displayed on the special display LED 612b, as well as the “push location guideline” instruction content. The content of the instruction can be arbitrarily determined within a range that does not negate the above. For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which “push order bell 1” having a forward push as “appropriate push order” is selected as a winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of “push order” to be “left / middle / right” (six choice push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 76 (details will be described later). “1” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, as the instruction content for clarifying only “left” of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, “first left (2 choices)” may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example 76 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, from the condition that the “appropriate push order” is not denied, the instruction content of the push order only needs to include at least a game procedure based on the “proper push order”. That is, as the instruction content having the possibility of the first stop of the left reel 301a, “Left first or right first” (segment display “E” in FIG. 76) or “Left first or first in middle” (FIG. 76 may be the instruction content, or may be the instruction content for which the pressing order is unknown (segment display “0” in FIG. 76).

  Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 75, as a guide for the pressing place, there are four types of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set for display. When “0” is displayed as a guide for the pressing position, it means that the guide for pressing is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game. Even if there is a pressing operation (unspecified stop operation) of the reel stop button 211 without being aware of the stop timing, the symbol combinations based on some winning combination are not necessarily aligned on the effective line. In other words, in the case where the symbol combination based on the winning combination is surely stopped in the game in which “not specified” is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the above-described maximum efficiency method. It is required to perform a stop operation. Specifically, for example, when “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” is won during ART, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is an appropriate push. As long as the stop operation is in order, the symbol combination of the bells can be aligned regardless of the stop timing (without missing). On the other hand, for example, when “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a when the winning combination is a role that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon role), the stop timing is not considered. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the watermelon role may be missed. To ensure that the watermelon role is won, when the symbols that make up the watermelon role combination are within the range that can be drawn The reel stop button 211 needs to be pressed at an appropriate timing.

  Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide for the pressing position is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the active line.

  In addition, for the symbols corresponding to “1” to “3” shown in FIG. 75, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the “chance symbol” that is the target of “1” may be a “right” symbol, a “righteous” symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the symbol “2” may be the “blue 7” symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 75 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, you may add a segment display about symbols (for example, watermelon symbol) other than those illustrated in FIG. In addition, the symbol set as a guide for the pressing location is not limited to one. For example, a segment display such as “either red 7 symbol or blue 7” is set as a guide for the pressing location. May be. 75 and FIG. 76, the correspondence between “content” and “seg display” does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of “seg display” indicating the same “content” is prepared. May be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as display contents of the segment display. . Below, the content which each display pattern means is demonstrated in detail. When displaying in 7 segments, the capital letters “B” and “D” may be indistinguishable from the numbers “8” and “0”, respectively. It is decided to display with lowercase letters.

  The display “0” in the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order is not asked). However, as described in the “Usage” column, it is not used only when the winning role is in any order, but when it is a winning role that can be won by alternative, the push order is intentionally instructed. It can also be used when not. The winning combination of any push order includes not only push order bells and replays, but also low chances (rare roles) such as chance eyes, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare role is won, the display on the special display LED 612b becomes “0”. At this time, the expected display such as “Chance!” And the rare role type display are displayed in the navigation display. You may make it perform. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach to the player that the game has a high degree of expectation different from normal. Further, in the latter case where the push order is not instructed in the case of a winning combination that can be won by alternative, the proper push order is not instructed, so the navigation display example is “????” .

  The indications “1” to “6” on the special display LEDs 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate push order, and displays a so-called six-choice push order. Can do. When the 6-option push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are instructed on the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clear in the erasure law, but may be clearly indicated.

  In addition, the indications “7” to “9” on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as an appropriate pressing order which one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, the so-called three-choice push order can be displayed. When the three-choice push order is displayed on the instruction function display, the reel to be stopped first is indicated on the navigation display.

  When the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as “1” to “9”, the largest payout occurs when the stop operation according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b is performed. A game result that is advantageous to the player is provided, for example, a push order bell wins in a stop form corresponding to the number of sheets. As described above, in order to obtain a stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

  Further, “providing a game result advantageous to the player” described in the previous paragraph includes “suppressing a game result that is disadvantageous to the player”. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described. For example, when a push order replay is prepared that stops different symbol combinations depending on the push order, and when a stop operation is performed according to a “specific push order”, the blue 7 symbol set stops Suppose you can. This blue 7 symbol set is used as one of the effects of teaching the addition when, for example, the push order replay is won during ART and it is internally determined that the number of ART games will be added. To do. When the number of ART games is added at the time of winning the push order replay, displaying the “specific push order” as an instruction function leads to the provision of “game results advantageous to the player”. On the other hand, if the instruction function is displayed when the number of ART games is not added while winning the push order replay and the instruction function is displayed, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since the “game result advantageous to the player”, which is the addition of the number of ART games, is not provided, the “game result unfavorable to the player” is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such “game result unfavorable to the player”, if the number of ART games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned push order replay winning, It is possible to display the instruction function so as to avoid the “order”. By playing the game in accordance with such indication function display, it is possible to prevent a blue 7 symbol set that does not increase the number of ART games from appearing, so that “a disadvantageous game result is provided to the player”. As a result, “a game result advantageous to the player is provided”.

  On the other hand, the displays “A” to “F” on the special display LED 612b are different from the cases where “1” to “9” are displayed, and “part” of the push order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display “A” only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (2 alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Also, for example, the display “d” indicates that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Even if an appropriate pushing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected at the first stop, any of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) is again rotated at the second stop. As a result, it is possible to select four options. If an appropriate push order is satisfied only by selection at the first stop, two alternatives can be made.

  As described above, when the order of pressing such as “A” to “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the order of pressing is not necessarily the proper order. However, when an appropriate push order can be finally selected, a game result advantageous to the player is provided, for example, the push order bell wins in the stop form that has the largest payout number.

  The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but actually, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction contents can be easily grasped. An appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while viewing the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and a more advantageous game result can be expected than when the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for a player to attract attention to a display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create gameability that is not found in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide for the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the volume of data required for the main board 409 to display the instruction function is reduced.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 performs the instruction function display by the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation process, while displaying the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction contents are notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510). The sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) in accordance with the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect processing).

  That is, when the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment generates the instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function while the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function is displayed on the image display body 500. Thus, the instruction content is notified in a manner that is more easily recognized by the player.

  50, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. There is no need, and if the display content does not violate the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display, the sub-board 501 may determine a display mode for navigation display from a plurality of display modes (one-to-n correspondence relationship) ).

  As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when “push order bell 2” is selected in the internal lottery, “1” is set to the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, “3” is set to the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and the right reel By displaying “2” at the corresponding position of 301c, the stop order of the left / right / middle pinching push is instructed. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is changed to yellow reminiscent of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, When all the reels 301 are rotating, the reels are stopped first. When two reels are rotating, the reels are stopped second). It may be highlighted.

  In the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first. Is a left reel 301a, an example in which a sound such as “It's left!” Is output at the timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When performing audio output, different audio outputs (for example, non-ART high probability state or non-ART low probability state) based on the type of winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.), lottery status (non-ART high probability state, non-ART low probability state, etc.) Character, dialogue, intonation, etc. are different). By performing navigation display including voice output in this way, notification of instruction contents to the player can be made more reliable, and navigation display with changes depending on the game situation can be provided to enhance the player's interest Can be expected.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be transmitted to the player more reliably.

  FIG. 77 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various display devices. In FIG. 77, various types of indicators and the like are described on the vertical axis, and a display period such as when the display or transmission is performed in one game progress process indicated on the horizontal axis is shown. .

  First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 77 will be described. The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510.

  The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409. When the instruction function 802 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means “non-display” and the special function LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

  The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game. When the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be displayed again even after the power is turned off, depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and program processing.

  The seg error 804 corresponds to the details (for example, type and content) of the error being displayed on the segment LED when the error is detected. When the seg error 804 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612. Details of the error are notified at (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

  The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means “display”, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with contents that do not contradict the display contents in the instruction function 802. Although detailed explanation is omitted, data related to the display by the sub board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510, and the data can be read back as appropriate even when the power is cut off. And

  The liquid crystal error 806 is equivalent to displaying details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. The details of the error are reported on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In addition, in the liquid crystal error 806, an error is notified with a content that does not contradict the notification in the seg error 804.

  The error occurrence 807 indicates an error occurrence state, but in this figure, it may be read that the main board 409 detects the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred at the timing when the error is turned ON (error has been detected). When the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (error has been detected) Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 is turned off after being turned on, it means that the error has been resolved at the timing when the error occurrence 807 is turned off.

  The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the seg error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

  In FIG. 77 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 that is first pressed among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 in which the reel 301 is stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (ie, last) reel 301. Means that the reel stop button 211 has been operated.

  Next, display periods (including a transmission period and the like) of each display unit shown in FIG. 77 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 77 is shown under a situation where a game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, and no payout has occurred in the game.

  In FIG. 77, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all the reels 301 from the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (pressing the third stop button). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of the rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 77, the start of the navigation display precedes the start of the instruction function display. However, the navigation display is displayed based on the contents of the instruction information command, and the contents of the instruction information command are the instructions. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

  In the timing chart of FIG. 77, the timing of “stop button press acceptance start” and the timing at which the instruction function 802 is turned on seem to be the same, but strictly speaking, after the start of the reel stop button 211 press acceptance. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of “stop button press acceptance start”, and in the processing on the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. In addition, the instruction function display is executed prior to the timing when the acceptance of the stop button press is started. The timings for the “stop button press acceptance start” and “instruction function display” are the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

  In FIG. 77, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set as a timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set at the start of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-described display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in a period from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the reel stop button 211 is pressed. May be started.

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. In FIG. 77, as an example, the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method” are shown. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is “forward press”, “squeeze press”, “middle forward press”, “middle reverse” as described above. There are six types of “press”, “reverse pinching”, and “reverse pressing”. In the following description regarding FIG. 77, for the sake of convenience, these pressing orders are designated as the reel stop button 211 on which the first pressing operation has been performed. Focusing on the above, it is classified in the order of three pushes. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is referred to as “forward pressing”, the case where it is the middle reel 301b is referred to as “middle pressing”, and the case where it is the right reel 301c is referred to as “reverse pressing”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second reel to be stopped (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the routine proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on.
As (MF = 1), the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when a condition device corresponding to a replay combination, a common bell of any pressing order, or the like is operating, the corresponding winning combination symbols can always be aligned without requiring the player to press. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay role, the bell role, etc., the corresponding winning role symbols are arranged every four symbols at the maximum (the above-mentioned diagrams). 46). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-in is 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of 4 as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to draw in the line.

  Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle when a predetermined replay role is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, the other symbols are the largest between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. Four are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn into one of the active lines and stopped be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the selected game, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In a game in which a subsequent small combination (or replay combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 has a winning combination symbol on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed). Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 79, the contents of this determination processing will be specifically described.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the active lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In particular, the stop eye when all the reels 301 are stopped is referred to as a stop eye.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state and OFF state of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game in-progress flag is ON, the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game in-progress flag is OFF, the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). The determination of the symbol combination will be described using a specific example. If the bonus is BB1 shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol array of “red 7” on the active line, When such a symbol arrangement is stopped on the diagonal line, it can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the active line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process relating to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process is terminated. To do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination). If it is determined that the symbol combination is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned OFF (step S306), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small character symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small character winning). ) Is determined (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small role symbol, as a process in step S309, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). put out). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out. And after the process of step S309 is complete | finished, the applicable small role winning flag is turned OFF (step S310), and a process is complete | finished.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a small role symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 is satisfied, and any symbol on the active line There are no winning symbols. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”. In such a case, a loss process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is ON at this time is a winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF. Further, when none of the winning flags is ON (in this case, the loss flag is ON), the loss flag is turned OFF. After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

  The above-described processing from step S302 to step S311 is processing executed when the general state or the bonus internal state is controlled. Next, the process after step S312 performed when determination of step S301 is not satisfy | filled is demonstrated. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) controlled to a bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the active line. “Bonus game payout symbol” as used herein means a collective name of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out when they are aligned during a bonus game. Specifically, in this example, a bonus game payout role (general This is a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination whose payout is prescribed in the state or the internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that have been prepared (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110 and the medal payout number is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout has been paid out.

  Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81), and then the determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned OFF (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern that is NO in step S312, it is conceivable that a bonus game payout combination is won, but is eliminated, and a bonus game payout combination is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the bonus game payout establishment flag is turned off, and in the latter case, the lose flag is turned off. If a bonus special combination that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and the bonus special combination is won, the process of step S315 can be performed. May be omitted.

  The processing in steps S301 to S315 described above is the gaming state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110). Thereafter, the ART game determination processing is performed in step S320.

  Since the slot machine 1 of this embodiment has an instruction function as described above, a determination process (ART game determination process) related to continuation and termination of an ART game, management of the number of games, and the like is performed for each game. There is a need to do. Since the ART game determination process corresponds to a performance process that affects the generation of an instruction, the main board 409 executes it.

  Note that the timing at which the ART game determination process is performed may be any suitable timing of the determination processes shown in FIG. 79, but here, as an example, the processes of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315 are performed. Later, it is assumed that the ART game determination process in step S320 is performed. Details of the ART game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 79 is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, BB flag) is ON. When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on and the bonus flag is turned off. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the bonus game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the bonus game is started with a specified number of bets of the bonus game (in this example, the specified number of BB games is two).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LEDs.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 in FIG. 79 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 79 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number exceeds the total payout number specified for each bonus (for example, 200). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative payout number in the bonus game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game in-progress flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game determination process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the ART game determination processing. As described above in [10-3-3] and the like, the ART game is a game that is executed based on the fact that the ART is won in the ART lottery. If the winning combination of “push order bell” is won, instruction information such as “appropriate push order” is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and an instruction effect (navigation display) along the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display 500 or the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process related to the start, continuation, and end of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly, the CPU 1110) that is an ART control body. Hereinafter, an example of the ART game determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an outline of the ART game will be described. The ART game is started when the ART game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the ART end condition is satisfied. [10-3-3] As described in the instruction function processing below, when the ART game start condition is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned ON and the ART game is started. At the end of the ART game, the ART flag is turned off. It should be noted that information such as an internal flag related to an ART game such as an ART flag and the number of ART games described later are held in a memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the ART game. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, the RAM 1122).

  The conditions for starting the ART game (conditions for turning on the ART flag) are as described in detail in [10-3-2] below, but simply speaking, the ART is won in the first lottery. That is.

  In step S501 of FIG. 82, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game, and it is determined whether or not the ART flag is ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether the ART flag has been changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag is turned on (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games (so-called initial number of games) at the start of ART may be set in advance as a fixed game number, or may be determined by lottery or other methods when an ART is won. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined in the above-described instruction function processing is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

  By performing the processing in step S502 as described above, the ART game is started from the next game. Note that at the start of the ART game, an effect that clearly indicates the start of the ART game and the number of ART games to the player is performed (for example, display of an ART start screen).

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the ART flag has been turned ON, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag has been ON since the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is It is determined whether or not it is ON (step S505). If the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the ART flag is ON and it is not in the special zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), this means that one game in the ART game has been played. Then, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of ART games is performed (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that it is in the specialized zone (YES in step S506), the ART game number is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), since the ART game is not in progress, the process is terminated as it is.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an extra function for adding the number of ART games based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the ART game, apart from the number of games at the start time determined at the start of the ART game. Suppose you have When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned ON, and the number of ART games to be added (additional game number) is determined. The condition for determining the extra is not particularly limited, and may be a winning of a specific winning combination in the winning lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method for determining the number of added games is not limited to a special method. Then, the processes in steps S508 to S510 below are processes performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is provided.

  First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the extra flag is ON. If the extra flag is ON (YES in step S508), a process of adding the extra game number to the current ART game number is performed (step S509), and the extra flag is turned OFF (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by an additional amount, and the duration of the ART game advantageous to the player is extended.

  After the process of step S510 (after the process of step S506 if the add-on function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is “0” (step S511). Since the ART game end condition is satisfied, the ART flag is turned OFF (step S512), and the process ends. At this time, not only the end of the ART game is clearly indicated to the player, but also information related to a series of ART games (for example, the total number of payout medals and the number of continued ART games in the ART game) is clearly indicated to the player. You can do it.

  If it is determined in step S511 that the current ART game number is not “0” (NO in step S511), the ART game end condition is not satisfied, and thus the process is ended without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game is continued in the subsequent games.

  The ART game determination process described with reference to FIG. 82 is a processing example in a case where the game period (ART game period) controlled to the gaming state for the ART game is a system in which one count is subtracted for each game. When the ART game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtraction method. .

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an ART start flag) indicating the start of an ART game may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination process. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON when the ART initial start lottery is won and the ART game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether the ART start flag is ON. If the ART start flag is ON, in step S502, the ART initial game is determined. After the number is set, the ART flag may be turned ON and the ART start flag may be turned OFF. If the ART start flag is OFF in Step S501, the processing after Step S505 is performed. You can do it.

[10-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various presentation operations are controlled by the sub board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) outputted from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggestion effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (an appearance that pays out appearance, and may be an aspect that informs the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, in the case where the winning flag is a bonus combination, or when the first winning lottery is performed in the ART, the notification effect is clearly shown to the player such as “Bonus confirmed!” Or “ART winning!”. It can be informed. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination that is particularly pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or ART (because a large amount of medals can be obtained). In other words, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate the player when the player wins the first ART.

  The various effects described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Game number management process]
By the way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a game number management process for managing the number of games by the game number management control means of the CPU 1110. The game number management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the game number management process based on the fact that the predetermined start condition is satisfied (starts the count process of the number of games), and the game based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied. By ending the number management process (ending the game number counting process), the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process as the specific section is counted, and the number of games is managed. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the game number management process ends, the number of games counted in the game number management process is initialized and returns to zero.

  The predetermined start condition described above for starting the game number management process is to shift from the hell state to another state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E). That is, the game number management process is started when it is determined that the instruction function display is performed at least once or immediately after a plurality of games (for example, 32 games) are consumed. Therefore, the game number management process is started from the next game in which the special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state.

  The above-mentioned predetermined end condition for completing the game number management process is that the number of games counted during the game number management process is set to a predetermined threshold value (in this example, 1500 games as described above). ) And at least one instruction function display has been performed, and even if the number of games counted during the game number management process has not reached a predetermined threshold, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display Is to move from the advantageous state to the hell state. For example, when the ceiling game is digested without winning the ART first lottery, even if the number of games counted during the game number management process has not reached a predetermined threshold, the instruction function display is executed. The game state involved shifts from the advantageous state to the hell state. When any one of the two conditions is satisfied in the game number management process, the game number management process ends. Here, the transition of the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display from the advantageous state to the hell state may be performed immediately after the ART game is finished, or after the withdrawal state after the ART game is finished. You may move to.

In the present embodiment, when the start condition for starting the game number management process is compared with the condition for ending the game number management process, the start condition for starting the game number management process is higher. It is comprised so that it may become. Therefore, comparing the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON with the period in which the game number management process is set to OFF, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is longer. ing. However, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON does not exceed 70% of the total period (the sum of the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period set to OFF). It has become. Note that the period in which the number-of-games management flag is set to ON is a period in which one of the advantageous states A to E and the pull-back state is controlled. Maximum. Further, the period in which the game number management process is set to OFF is a period in which the game number management process is controlled to the hell state. In this hell state, the execution of the ART game has not been finalized (in other words, the operation of the instruction function display is not permitted, and the above-mentioned conditional devices are grouped) , but the ART first hit The winning probability in the lottery (probability determined as YES in step S6011) is 1/20, and it is configured to be able to win by executing less games than 32 games set as the number of ceiling games. Thereby, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it becomes possible to suppress the fall of an interest suitably, suppressing euphoria.

  Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 has an ART game forced ending means, and even if the ART game forced ending means is in the ART game, the number of games counted in the game number management process is predetermined. Based on the fact that the threshold has been reached, the ART game is forcibly terminated immediately.

  Thus, in the game after the ART game is forcibly ended, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is controlled to the hell state. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state remains RT2 or RT3, and transitions to RT1 based on the appearance of the zero bell zero. In this way, the ART game is forcibly terminated based on the fact that the number of games counted in the game number management process has reached a predetermined threshold, so that the number of game media as a prize can be reduced in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a large amount is given from being accidentally generated, and it is possible to suppress accidental mischievousness.

  In addition, when a bonus game is executed by winning BB in the above hell state, the game state related to execution of the instruction function display during the bonus game is controlled to the hell state unless a special role is won. It is up to. And if it is in this hell state and the special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is won during the bonus game, the transition destination is any one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state D. For example, the game number management flag is set to ON and counting of the game number counter GC is started, and at the same time, the hell state is shifted to the advantageous state of the shift destination. However, if the transition destination is the advantageous state E, the game number management flag is set to ON and the game number counter GC starts counting. However, after the bonus game ends, the RT state changes from RT1 to RT2. It will be started when it is migrated. It should be noted that a lottery related to execution of the instruction function display (such as an ART first lottery) may not be performed during the bonus game or inside the bonus. For example, even if a special role is selected in the internal lottery, the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 may not be performed, and it is not determined whether or not it is a special role in step S6011. (That is, it is the same as when a normal role is selected). However, in the game in which the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery, a lottery (ART lottery or the like for the initial ART) may be performed in relation to the execution of the instruction function display.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
The overall game flow in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow. In describing the overall game flow, each control state in the slot machine 1 of the present example will be described in order.

  First, the slot machine 1 of this example, when viewed from the viewpoint of the RT state, is a general state controlled after the bonus game is finished, and is controlled when the 0th bell zero appears, RT1, RT1, and a replay 1 RT2 is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay appears in RT2 or RT2 controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to the up-replay 2 appears in RT2. Either a bonus internal state controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to those of BB2 is won but not appearing, or a bonus state where a symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 appears and the bonus game is being executed In addition, it is controlled by the RT state control means.

  Further, when viewed from the viewpoint of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display, it is determined that the execution of the instruction function display has not yet been determined and that the instruction function display is executed at least once. Control is performed by the instruction function control means in any of states A to E and a pull-back state. In addition, as described above, the advantageous state is different from the advantageous state E in which the instruction function display is controlled by an ART game that can be operated continuously over a plurality of games, as well as the degree of expectation to be shifted to the advantageous state E. States A to D and a withdrawal state are prepared.

  The instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to one of an ON state in which the operation of the instruction function is permitted and an OFF state in which the operation of the instruction function is not permitted. The operation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not permitted even if the first lottery for ART is won unless the number of ceiling games is consumed, and is permitted based on the number of ceiling games being consumed (ON). When the game ends, the permission is released (OFF).

  Further, the game number management control means sets the game number management flag to the ON state where the game number management control is performed (the number of games executed by the player is counted) and the game number management control is not performed (game). The number of games executed by the user is not counted) and is controlled to one of the OFF states. The game number management control by the game number management control means is not executed in the hell state (OFF), but is executed based on the transition from the hell state to any one of the advantageous states A to E (ON). .

  Further, when viewed from the viewpoint of the game state that can be grasped by the player (hereinafter referred to as “appearance state”), the general game state in which the number of ceiling games is not set and the execution of the instruction function display is not fixed, Predictive game state where execution of instruction function display is confirmed and ceiling game number is set, single instruction state where instruction function display is performed only once, ceiling game number is digested and instruction function flag is set to ON Prepared state (a state in which an ART game is ready to be executed, that is, a state in which an ART game can be executed when a symbol combination corresponding to Raise Replay 2 appears), and a symbol combination corresponding to Raise Replay 2 appears. The player grasps that the game state is one of an ART state during the game and a pull-back state after the ART game ends (the pull-back state). Door can be.

  The instruction function is allowed to operate in the above-mentioned preparation state and ART state, and is not allowed to operate in the general game state, the precursor game state, and the pull-back state. However, for the precursor game state and the CZ state (advantageous states A and D of the present embodiment), the state (the precursor game state and the CZ state) is digested to a predetermined number of games (in the advantageous state A, 32 games, in the advantageous state D) (10 games). However, the instructions are not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the predetermined number of games is consumed, “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” are selected in the internal lottery. If any one of them is selected, the order of pressing may be instructed, and when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the state may be immediately shifted to the hell state.

  The game number management control is not executed in the general game state in which the execution of the instruction function display is not fixed, and is based on the selection of the special role in the internal lottery (that is, the instruction function display is executed once or more). The execution is started based on the fact that it has been determined that it has been determined (the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state)). Further, when it is determined that the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process (game number management flag ON) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is executed once or more. As a condition (except when a bonus game is executed), the game number management flag is set to OFF.

  Next, the overall game flow will be described. When the RT state is RT1 and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state, the execution state of the instruction function display has not been confirmed, so the appearance state is the general state. At this time, both the instruction function flag and the game number management flag are OFF. Then, when a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and transferred to one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, the number of games is managed. The flag is set to ON. As a result, the appearance state is shifted from the general game state to the precursor game state (at the time of advantageous state A to C transition), CZ (at the time of advantageous state D transition), or the ART game (at the time of advantageous state E transition).

  In the precursor game state, the number of ceiling games is set, and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. When the number of ceiling games is consumed, the instruction function flag is set to ON. In FIG. 83, control is first made to the advantageous state A. After the instruction function display is executed only once, the state is shifted to the hell state and the game number management flag is set to OFF.

  When a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent hell state and the state is shifted to one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, the game number management flag is set to ON and the appearance state is the general game. The state is shifted to the precursor game state. FIG. 83 shows a state where the state is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state B.

  When the ceiling game is consumed in the advantageous state B, the appearance state shifts from the precursor game state to the preparation state, and the instruction function flag is set to ON. Then, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay 1 is displayed when the player performs a stop operation based on the indication function display, the RT state Is shifted from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 83 is started (becomes ART state). When the ceiling game is digested in the advantageous state B and is shifted from the precursor game state to the preparation state, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state B to the advantageous state E.

  During the ART game (in the ART state), since the instruction function flag is set to ON, even if “down lip + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, the player is based on the instruction function display. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the stop function is stopped. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the lowering replay is displayed after stopping the display in response to the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained while the instruction function is maintained. The transition is from RT2 to RT1. However, if “Raising Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip” is selected in the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the indication function display, the symbol combination corresponding to Raising Replay 1 is displayed and the RT state is displayed. Returns from RT1 to RT2.

  Further, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when “raising lip 1 + normal maintenance lip” is selected in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising lip 1 by the stop operation is selected by the player. It may be displayed accidentally. In this case, although the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, the ART game is not started because the number of ceiling games has not been digested. When the zero-th bell is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to R1.

  When the first ART game shown in FIG. 83 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the withdrawal state. The RT state is maintained at RT2 unless a zero bell zero is displayed, but when a zero bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

  The withdrawal state is terminated when the maintenance lottery is lost, and accordingly, the instruction function display is executed on condition that the instruction function display is executed once or more (except when the bonus game is executed). The game state involved is shifted from the pullback state to the hell state. However, when the number of games counted by the game number management control means reaches a threshold value during the withdrawal state, if the instruction function display is executed at least once, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the instruction function display The game state related to the execution of the game is shifted from the pullback state to the hell state.

  In this example, when the first ART game is over, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value. In FIG. 83, the state when the first lottery for the ART is won in the pull-back state. It is shown. If the ART first win lottery is won in the retracted state, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 83 is started. The At this time, if the RT state is shifted to RT1, the ART game is started when the RT1 is shifted to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game is started immediately. However, in this case, even if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game may be started after several games are executed. When the second ART game shown in FIG. 83 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the withdrawal state.

  In this example, when the second ART game is over, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value. In FIG. 83, BB1 is selected by internal lottery in the pull-back state. The state is shown. When BB1 is selected in the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed is the bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, the bonus state is established and the CPU 1110 has. A bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means.

  Regardless of whether the bonus game is executed or not, if the player wins the maintenance lottery without winning the ART initial winning lottery in the pullback state, the pullback state ends and the execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed. The game state is entered, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the retracted state to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set OFF. Even if the bonus game is being executed, if the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

  In FIG. 83, during the bonus state (during the execution of the bonus game), it is determined that the ART first win lottery is won and the game is shifted to, for example, the advantageous state B, and the ceiling game of 32 games is set and the precursor game state is set. The state that has become is shown. At this time, the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the game number management flag is set to ON. When the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the general state (RT0), and when the zero bell zero is displayed in the general state, the RT state shifts from the general state (RT0) to RT1. Is done.

  In FIG. 83, since the ceiling game has not been digested at the time when the bonus game ends, the precursor game state continues. When the zero bell is displayed, the RT state is shifted from the general state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is digested and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the appearance state is a precursor game state. To ready state.

  Thereafter, when “uplift replay 1 + normal maintenance replay” is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to uplift replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2 and is shown in FIG. The third ART game is started to enter the ART state, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E.

  When the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set ON) reaches the threshold during the third ART game, The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the game number management process ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the ART game being executed is forcibly ended. At this time, even if the prescribed number of games has not been consumed, the ART game is forcibly terminated halfway. When the ART game is forcibly ended in this way, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state, and the appearance state becomes the general game state.

  Even if the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches a threshold value, the game number management process If the instruction function display is not executed once, the transition to the hell state is avoided until the instruction function display is executed at least once, and if the ART game is in progress, the ART game continues, The instruction function flag is also kept on. When the instruction function display is performed once, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends, and the instruction function flag is set to OFF and the ART game being executed is forcibly set. When finished, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

  However, if even one bonus game is executed during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not performed once during the game number management process, When the counted number of games (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches a threshold value, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process is executed. At the same time, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly ended, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83, when the bonus game is being executed (in the bonus state) and the first lottery for the ART is won and the game is shifted to an advantageous state, the number of games counted during the game number management process. When the threshold value reaches the threshold value, even if the instruction function display is not performed once during the game number management process, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends. Is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

  Even if the ART game is forcibly ended, RT2 is maintained in the RT state as long as the zero bell zero is not displayed, and the RT1 is changed to RT1 based on the zero bell zero being displayed. Migrated. In FIG. 83, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is controlled to RT2 for a while after the game state is shifted to the hell state, and thereafter, the state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

  Then, when a special role is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and the game state relating to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to any one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E (in FIG. 83). The game state management flag is set to ON, and the game number management process is started. And if it transfers to the advantageous state in which the number of precursor games is set, an external appearance will change from a general game state to a precursor game state.

  Note that FIG. 83 does not show an aspect in which the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, but the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the up Replay combination 2 is on the active line. Is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, and the specialized zone state is entered.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when the state is shifted to the advantageous state D, the state is shifted to the chance zone (CZ). However, in FIG. The chance zone (CZ) is not shown in the status column.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the period during which the game number management flag is set to ON (period controlled to the advantageous state) and the period during which the game number management flag is set to OFF (hell state) The period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is higher, and the game number management flag is set to ON in all periods. The period is set so as not to exceed 70%. Then, in the hell state as the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF, although the execution of the instruction function display has not been confirmed, the probability that the special combination will be selected in the internal lottery is set as the number of ceiling games. A special combination can be selected by executing less than 32 games. In addition, even if the transition destination when the special role is selected is not the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E, when the transition destination is the advantageous state C or the advantageous state D, the expectation of the ART game is given to the player. Can be given. Therefore, when the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold G, the game number management process is ended and the state is shifted to the hell state. Since the expectation that the ART game is executed is increased as compared with the above, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

[10-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
Processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during the game, an error notification is made according to the type of error detected. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or flashes), and an error display indicating the type of the error can be performed by the special display LED 612. The special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In addition, an error may not be detected, but a sudden power interruption is also included in the abnormal state.

  When an abnormal state as described above occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of a power interruption, it is sufficient that an error display does not remain after the power is restored). Although the error canceling method varies depending on the error that has occurred, there are many cases in which it is necessary to turn off the power (OFF / ON).

[10-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON is performed, the value of data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting the value is performed. Therefore, even when the error cancellation processing is performed, there is a possibility that a part of the data held in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the power is turned OFF / ON.

  However, when the error canceling process is performed while the instruction function is displayed or the power is cut off while the medal is paid out, the data used for the instruction function display and the payout number display is cleared by clearing the RAM. A case that hinders the continuation of the game is assumed. In the slot machine 1, in consideration of such a problem, the RAM clear target range in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining a data block of the RAM. FIG. 84 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read and written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is grouped on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 84, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are determined in advance according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of “clear range 0” to “clear range 4” are defined as the RAM clear target ranges. Each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

  First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range that is basically not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clear in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, the data value is not cleared in the set value data area 1114a except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is not basically cleared.

  “Clear range 1” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of a setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

  “Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, the data area below the lamp ON data area 1114d is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

  “Clear range 3” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. Clearing RAM from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by hall clerk as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but RAM clearing at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends Is executed automatically. In the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84, the data area below the replay insertion number area 1114j is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area 1114i is not cleared.

  The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned OFF / ON. That is, when the power is turned OFF / ON without changing the setting or resetting, the data area that is the target range in “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the “clear range 3”, the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power OFF / ON.

  “Clear range 4” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the bet number of medals is determined. In the RAM clear at the start of every game, specifically, the data area within the display flag area 1114l among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 84 is targeted, and the setting value data area 1114a to the interrupt check The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

  Next, each data area shown in FIG. 84 will be briefly described. The setting value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a.

  Information indicating the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

  The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information related to lighting of lamps (for example, a display device 501 such as a replay lamp 606 or a start lamp 608). The credit number area 1114e stores information indicating the number of credits (medal storage number). In the credit display area 1114f, information for displaying the stored medal number on the stored number display LED 613 is stored. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game. In the payout display area 1114h, information for displaying the medal payout number on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the instruction function display area 1114i, information corresponding to the instruction content by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is stored.

  In the replay insertion number area 1114j, the number of game values to be inserted at the time of the replay operation (the number of medals inserted at the time of replay) is stored. Timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process is stored in the interrupt check timer area 1114k.

  Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, a payout number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating whether or not a game value can be input is stored. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of game values inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

  As described above, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 can be expected to realize efficient memory control by setting a range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (setting change, power OFF / ON, etc.).

  Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, with regard to the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 84) outside the prescribed range. Is allowed. However, the use of such unused areas is limited to gaming machines having an instruction function.

  In the slot machine 1, whether or not to redisplay the data displayed before the RAM is cleared after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may redisplay the data as much as possible with reference to the data stored in the data area that has not been cleared of the RAM at the time of power recovery, or specific data (for example, The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc. can be theoretically redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referring to the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[10-7-2. error indication]
Next, error display in the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “notification type” column in FIG. 85 (which will be described later, including some that are not errors) is detected, the special display LED 612 indicates that the error is indicated in the “SEG” column. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Of the errors shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 85, errors other than “communication abnormality (during series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510 are each detected by the error detection signal. The substrate 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 85 are a part of errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510 in addition to the illustrated errors.

  Below, an outline of each error shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 85 will be described.

  The “RAM error” is an error that is notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication abnormality (during series code error)” is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510, but is detected by the sub board 510, so that a special display is displayed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

  Although “setting change” or “setting confirmation” is not an error, “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and is described in FIG. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing when “setting is being changed” is set at the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing when “setting is being checked” is set at the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

  The “illegal payout error” is an error that is notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown; a switch for counting the number of payout medals, for example) other than when a medal is paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal discharge device 110. Detected when the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 85, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is “when the main game is not stopped” or “when the main game is stopped”. The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, regardless of the timing, the special display LED 612 displays the same “HF” segment.

  “Inserted medal passage time 1 error”, “inserted medal passage time 2 error”, “medal passage order 1 error”, “medal passage order 2 error”, “medal passage interval time error”, and “inserted medal reverse error” This error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process from when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 until it reaches the hopper 1110b. The anomaly here includes an anomaly caused by the insertion of a foreign object other than a medal, in addition to an anomaly related to a medal passage route.

  In the slot machine 1, when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 is detected by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is OFF), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the chute sensor are thereafter detected. The hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, selector sensor, and chute sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect the passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return bar 213. Returned to the tray 201. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (specified medal passage sequence), the main board 409 is based on the presence / absence of detection in each sensor, the detection time, and the like. Detect each of the above errors.

  An outline of each error will be explained. The “inserted medal passage time 1 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the insertion sensor 207b is detected. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is performed for a predetermined time. Detected when (for example, 500 ms) continues. The detection target period of “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is always set, but the notification timing of the error is at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after completion of the payout process).

  The “medal passing order 1 error” is an error that is notified when medal detection by the selector sensor is performed even though medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the lever sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor. The “medal passing order 2 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the chute sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the chute sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor.

  The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected during normal operation. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, any object is detected with a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed in normal time (that is, a passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). The error is detected when the state of passing is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times).

  The “inserted medal retrograde error” is an error that is notified when the medal moves along a route other than the prescribed medal passage sequence, and particularly when a backward motion is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, chute sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

  The “payout medal jam error”, “payout medal empty error”, and “auxiliary storage full error” are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality related to medal payout or storage. The outline of each error will be described. First, the “payout medal jam error” is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, the error is detected when the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or longer. Further, the “payout medal empty error” is an error that is notified when the medal in the hopper 110b becomes empty. Specifically, when a medal from the hopper 110b is not normally paid out and a payout retry (payout retry) is performed, the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, the error is detected when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard.

  The “priority” column in FIG. 85 indicates the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time. Even if an error having a higher priority than that error is detected after one error is detected, The display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of an error with a high priority detected later. In the “SEG” column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be resumed (the next game is played) unless those errors are canceled.

  In the “notification method” column, when “video” is “◯”, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display 500, for example. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents different from the error display on the special display LED 612. When “Sound” is “◯”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error with a high priority is detected, an error with a low priority is detected. You may make it the alerting | reporting aspect which is emphasized compared.

  The “reset cancellation” column indicates whether or not the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. For errors that can be reset, the data area (see FIG. 84) of “clear range 2” of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the error is canceled by reset.

  If “immediate” is written in the “responsiveness” column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side when the slot machine 1 is operating. For example, when an unauthorized payout error is detected, the main board 409 issues a command for notifying the detection immediately. That is, even if “immediately” is described, it is not always necessary to immediately display an error when the error is detected. For example, after a game result is obtained (after the payout process is completed or the payout process is completed). An error may be displayed before the start of the process. Note that the fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error meaning that the gaming value has been illegally paid out.

[10-7-3. Processing when an error occurs]
In the following, a process when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during the game (error occurrence process) will be described. The specific details of the processing at the time of error occurrence differ depending on what requirement definition the slot machine 1 has for the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes a requirement definition (first requirement definition) relating to an error as described below, and details of an error occurrence process performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping (for example, strong error and weak error) based on importance is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

  86 and 87 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in this embodiment. 86 and 87 are combined into one flowchart. This flowchart is based on the overall processing procedure of one game based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 50, and further shows the processing performed when an error occurs. Show. 86 and 87 show a processing procedure example when the game progresses when there is no power interruption (that is, the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 88 described later is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of the power interruption recovery process in the present embodiment. In FIG. 88, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned OFF / ON in the processing of FIGS.

[10-7-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (when power is not interrupted)]
With reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of occurrence of an error (when no power is interrupted) will be described. Note that since the overall processing flow overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 50, detailed description of the processing that has already been described is omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes in FIGS. 86 and 87 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In addition, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with “the state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 78 is also shown.

  First, in FIG. 86, as described in the BET process of FIG. 50, after a predetermined number of game values (specifically, medals) are inserted, the player presses the start lever 210 to perform the game. The process is started (step S801). Such a game flow corresponds to “pressing the start lever” from “medal insertion” shown in FIG.

When the start lever 210 is pressed and the game is started, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a conditional device that is allowed to operate based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

  Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the special display LED 612 is a section in which the instruction function display is possible. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. Until now, the instruction function display has been mainly described during the ART game. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the ART game (for example, the ART is relatively won). The instruction function may be displayed even in a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to perform. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in a game other than the ART game.

  If it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is possible (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 instructs by the instruction function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to “reel rotation start” shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

  Thereafter, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the instruction function display are as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. In addition, the predetermined display timing related to “navigation display” and “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (specifically, when the main board 409 does not determine that the instruction function is instructed) (NO in step S804). The reel 301 starts rotating without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811), and accepting the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started (step S811). Step S812).

  Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptable” shown in FIG. Then, after the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to “first stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process in step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process in step S819 is performed. In FIG. 87, when an error is detected in step S814, it is shown that the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. The processing in step S819 may be performed after a reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. The same applies to step S816. Such processing after error detection may be made different in priority (importance) depending on the type of error, and the processing may be used properly based on the priority. For example, an error that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation such as “HF (illegal payout error)” should be a high priority error. If such a high priority error is detected, the process of step S819 should be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. preferable.

  In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to “second stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the subsequent pressing of the third stop button (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process in step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating.

  In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 77 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to “third stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether an error has been detected until a predetermined time elapses after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). (Step S818). Thereafter, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether or not an error is detected in step S818.

  In step S819, the instruction function display on special display LED 612 is terminated. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (NO in step S804), the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, and special processing is required in step S819. There is no.

  Thereafter, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to “all reel stop” shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the processing in step S819 and step S820 is performed regardless of whether or not an error has been detected during the game up to that point, but whether or not the subsequent processing is determined to have detected an error. It depends on what. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S821 is performed. If an error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S825 is performed. Is done.

  First, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the game so far, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a game value has been paid out. In the game value payout, when it is confirmed that the winning combination is stopped based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected, and the game is ended. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the payout number display on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and a game value (medal) payout process is performed (step S823). . Thereafter, since no error is detected, the game is terminated.

  On the other hand, as processing when an error has been detected during the game up to that point, it is first determined whether or not the gaming value has been paid out (step S824).

  The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821). When it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), steps S822 (payout number display) and S823 are performed. The process of (dispensing process) is the same.

  However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S826 and S827 is performed in order to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared after the payout process is completed (step S825), and then the processes after step S826 are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

  In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the types of errors detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. Thereafter, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk or the sales office (step S827), and the game is ended.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function display and the payout number display. Without blocking, it is possible to notify the player or hall clerk of the type of error detected by displaying an error.

  Note that a gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be expressed as a technical idea in addition to the gaming machine described in claim 1.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A plurality of symbol rows that can be variably displayed, and a stop operation means that can stop the symbol rows that are variably displayed;
A game machine in which a game result appears when the stop operation means is operated,
An internal lottery execution means for performing a lottery for a predetermined role;
Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the bonus combination selected in the combination lottery;
Advantageous game execution lottery means for performing an advantageous game execution lottery capable of continuously generating an operation mode instruction of the stop operation means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing the advantageous game based on the result of the advantageous game execution lottery being a specific result;
As a game state related to execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, any one of an instruction allowable state in which the execution of the instruction can be allowed and an instruction disabled state in which the execution of the instruction cannot be allowed Instruction state control means that can be controlled to
An instruction state transition control means for transitioning from the instruction permissible state to the instruction impermissible state based on a predetermined termination condition being satisfied;
An instruction state instructing means capable of grasping which of the instruction permissible state and the instruction impermissible state is controlled;
With
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, the instruction state transition control means can shift from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disabling state while maintaining the execution of the bonus game. It is characterized by this.

  The gaming machine described in the above technical idea is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) that can continuously generate an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means. In addition, this type of gaming machine also includes an internal lottery means for performing a lottery for a predetermined combination each time a game is executed.

  In the above-mentioned combination lottery, a plurality of combinations are targeted for the lottery, and a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game based on the selection of a bonus combination in the combination lottery is provided. In addition, a plurality of winning combinations to be selected in the winning combination lottery are awarded to the player when the stop operation means is operated in an appropriate operation mode and when it is operated in an inappropriate operation mode. Indicators having different amounts of game media are included. The instructor corresponds to “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6” in the present embodiment, and when operated in an appropriate operation mode, for example, eight game media are awarded as prizes and are inappropriate. When operated in the operation mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media are awarded as prizes (in the case of 0, no prize game media is awarded). The proper operation mode and the inappropriate operation mode described above correspond to cases where the push order is correct and incorrect, but are not limited thereto. For example, when the timing for stopping the stop operation means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is correct, for example, eight game media are awarded as prizes and the stop operation timing is stopped. For example, 1 or 0 game media may be awarded as a prize (in the case of 0, no game media as a prize is awarded).

  The advantageous game execution lottery means performs an advantageous game execution lottery in which an instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. The instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means can be generated continuously. The instruction that prompts the stop operation means to operate in an appropriate operation mode can be generated continuously over a plurality of games. Means that. The advantageous game execution lottery corresponds to the internal lottery or the transfer destination determination lottery described in the present embodiment if the instruction impossible state (hell state) described later is used, and the instruction allowable state (advantageous state) described later. ) Corresponds to “ART first lottery” or “addition determination lottery” described in the present embodiment.

  The advantageous game is executed when the result of the lottery of the advantageous game (for example, ART game) is a specific result. That is, if the result of the lottery of the advantageous game when the advantageous game is not in progress is a specific result, the advantageous game is executed immediately or based on the display of a specific symbol combination. If the result of the advantageous game execution lottery is a specific result, the advantageous game is added and the execution period is extended.

  As lottery states in which the advantageous game execution lottery is performed, a plurality of lottery states having different degrees of expectation for obtaining specific results are prepared. In the present embodiment, as a lottery state when an advantageous game is being executed, an ART medium low probability state, an ART medium high probability state, a special zone, and a special zone are being prepared. Further, as a lottery state when the advantageous game is not being executed, a hell state, advantageous states A to E, and a withdrawal state are prepared.

  Further, as a game state relating to execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, one of an instruction allowable state in which the instruction can be executed and an instruction impossible state in which the instruction cannot be executed are allowed. It is configured to be controllable. The instruction allowable state corresponds to the advantageous state described in the present embodiment, and the instruction disabling state corresponds to the hell state described in the present embodiment. Even if the instruction is allowed, the instruction function flag described in the present embodiment is not always set to ON, but the instruction is issued at a desired timing (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It is possible to set the function flag to ON. On the other hand, the instruction disabling state is impossible to set the instruction function flag to ON, and is defined as an advantageous state when the instruction function flag is set to ON.

  In the present embodiment, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON corresponds to the above-described instruction allowable state, and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF corresponds to the above-described instruction disable state. .

  Further, when a special combination (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction shifts from the instruction disabled state to the instruction allowable state. Here, in the instruction allowable state, a plurality of states having different degrees of expectation that the advantageous game is executed are prepared. When the state is changed from the instruction disabled state to the instruction allowable state, the counting unit counts parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter here is the number of games executed in this embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of games (the number of game media given as a prize and the number of game media used for game execution) Or the number of times the above-mentioned indicator is selected by internal lottery.

  When the parameter counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the instruction allowable state ends and the instruction is disabled. In the present embodiment, as the predetermined condition, when the parameter (for example, the number of games executed) counted in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E as the instruction allowable state or the withdrawal state reaches a threshold value, the instruction allowable state ends. Thus, the instruction is disabled. However, if the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means has not been performed once in the instruction permissible state (except when the bonus game is executed in the instruction permissible state), the parameter is compared in the instruction permissible state. Even if the threshold value is reached, the instruction is not immediately shifted to the instruction disabling state, and the instruction permissible state continues until an instruction on the operation mode of the stop operation means is performed at least once. If there is a bonus game execution history in the instruction-permitted state, even if the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation unit has not been performed once in the instruction-permitted state, it is counted by the counting unit. If the parameters satisfy the predetermined condition, the instruction permissible state is terminated and the instruction is disabled.

  Even if the parameter counted by the counting means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the instruction allowable state is ended based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the instruction is disabled. The predetermined end condition corresponds to, for example, a case where the player draws the maintenance lottery in the withdrawal state, or a case where the ceiling game (predictor game) is consumed without winning the advantageous game execution lottery. Then, when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the instruction is shifted from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disabled state regardless of whether or not there is an advantageous game execution history in the instruction allowable state.

  By the way, the predetermined end condition may be satisfied during execution of the bonus game. In this case, it is configured to shift from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disabling state while maintaining execution of the bonus game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress gambling while ensuring execution of the bonus game executed as a result of the role lottery, and it is preferable to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The above parameters are updated as the game progresses, but the update method may be a method of adding and updating as the game progresses, or subtracting and updating from the specified value as the game progresses. It may be a technique. For example, when the above parameter is “the number of games executed”, 1 is added when one game is executed if the method is an addition update, and 1 game is executed if the method is a subtraction update. 1 is subtracted. In the present embodiment, when one game is executed, the number of executed games is incremented by 1, and when the number of executed games reaches a threshold value, the instruction allowable state ends. On the other hand, in the method of subtracting and updating, when one game is executed, 1 is subtracted from the above threshold value, and when it becomes 0, the instruction allowable state ends.

  In addition, there is provided instruction state teaching means (section display lamp 605) that indicates whether the instruction is allowed or not. Thereby, the player can grasp whether the game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means is controlled between the instruction allowable state and the instruction disabled state.

  In the present embodiment, the number of stay games in the instruction-permitted state is higher than the number of stay games in the instruction-permitted state and the number of stay games in the instruction-incapable state. Further, in the instruction allowable state, when the counted parameter reaches the threshold value, the state is shifted to the instruction disabled state. And, in the hell state as the instruction impossibility state, although it is not determined to shift to the advantageous state, the degree of expectation that the ART game is executed (the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E) is at least In the advantageous state A, the ART game is configured to be larger than an expected degree of execution. For this reason, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing euphoria.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Installation Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow bowl 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary medal storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Protruding portion 112m-1 Protruding portion 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop Button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal basket 213 Return basket 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a -2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Concave groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel substrate 313 Cable 315 Detent 316 Handle 321a to 321c Reel belt 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Pattern display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcing member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 416 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 4 0 Hinge bracket 420a Fixed member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapped area 420h Overlapped area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle side 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector main body 429a Holder cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illuminating device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 700 Connection 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A plurality of symbol rows that can be variably displayed, and a stop operation means that can stop the symbol rows that are variably displayed;
A game machine in which a game result appears when the stop operation means is operated,
An internal lottery execution means for performing a lottery for a predetermined role;
Bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the bonus combination selected in the combination lottery;
Advantageous game execution lottery means for performing an advantageous game execution lottery capable of continuously generating an operation mode instruction of the stop operation means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing the advantageous game based on the result of the advantageous game execution lottery being a specific result;
As a game state related to execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, any one of an instruction allowable state in which the execution of the instruction can be allowed and an instruction disabled state in which the execution of the instruction cannot be allowed Instruction state control means that can be controlled to
An instruction state transition control means for transitioning from the instruction permissible state to the instruction impermissible state based on a predetermined termination condition being satisfied;
An instruction state instructing means capable of grasping which of the instruction permissible state and the instruction impermissible state is controlled;
With
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, the instruction state transition control means can shift from the instruction allowable state to the instruction disabling state while maintaining the execution of the bonus game. A gaming machine characterized by that.